Contents

BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 272
1 of 272

Summary of Content for BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

128i 135i

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/11, 03 11 450 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Contents

The quickest way to find special topics is to consult the index, refer to page 254.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 10 Dashboard 16 iDrive 23 Voice activation system

Controls 28 Opening and closing 45 Adjustments 54 Transporting children safely 57 Driving 70 Controls overview 82 Technology for driving comfort and

safety 94 Lamps 99 Climate 104 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 116 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 124 Navigation system 125 Destination entry 134 Destination guidance 141 What to do if

Entertainment 144 On/off and tone 147 Radio 150 Satellite radio 155 CD/DVD player and CD changer 161 Music collection 166 External devices

Communications 176 Telephone 188 Office 196 Contacts 198 ConnectedDrive

Mobility 206 Refueling 208 Wheels and tires 216 Under the hood 221 Maintenance 223 Care 227 Replacing components 234 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 242 Technical data 247 Short commands for the voice activation

system 254 Everything from A to Z

N o

te s

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehi- cle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet avail- able at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

5

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The individual vehicle When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari- ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip- ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repair Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electron-

ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle per- formed only by your BMW center or at a work- shop that works according to BMW repair pro- cedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop- erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of accessories not approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim- ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<

N o

te s

6

California Proposition 65 warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con- ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehi- cle to meet different prevailing operating condi- tions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

7

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance mea- sures:

> BMW Maintenance system

> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov- ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War- ranty.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your center, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele- phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

D as

h b

o ar

d

10

Dashboard

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 38

2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 38

3 Opening and closing front windows 37

4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 51

5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 51

6 Parking lamps 94

Low beams 95

Automatic headlamp control* 94 Adaptive Light Control* 95 High-beam Assistant* 96

A t

a g

la n

ce

11

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

7 Fog lamps* 97

8 Turn signals 66

High beams, headlamp flasher 96

High-beam Assistant* 96

Roadside parking lamps* 96

Computer 71

Settings and information about the vehicle 73

9 Instrument cluster 12

10 Windshield wipers 67

Rain sensor* 67

11 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 57

12 Ignition lock 57

13 Buttonson the steering wheel

Telephone*:

Accepting and ending a call; dial- ing* the selected phone number; redialing if no phone number is selected

Volume

Activating/deactivating the voice activation system*

Changing the radio station Interrupting a traffic bulletin Selecting a music track Scrolling through the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated air mode 101

14 Steering wheel heating* 53

15 Horn, entire surface

16 Adjusting the steering wheel 52

17 Cruise control* 68

18 Releasing the hood 216

19 OBD socket 222

20 Opening the trunk lid 33

D as

h b

o ar

d

12

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer 135i: with fuel gauge

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Tachometer 70

5 Fuel gauge 71 135i: engine oil temperature 71

6 Display for

> Clock 70

> Outside temperature 70

> Indicator and warning lamps 78

7 Display for

> Position of automatic transmission* 59

> Gear indicator in 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch* 62

> Computer 71

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 74

> Odometer and trip odometer 70

> High-beam Assistant* 96

> Checking the oil level 217

> Settings and information 73

8 Resetting the trip odometer 70

A t

a g

la n

ce

13

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages

You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 78.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

High beams/headlamp flasher 96

Fog lamps* 97

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propul- sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 84

Canada: parking brake applied 59

Parking brake applied 59

Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 222

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 222

D as

h b

o ar

d

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

A t

a g

la n

ce

15

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

1 Coupe: microphone for voice activation system* and for telephone* in hands-free mode Convertible: microphone on steering col- umn

2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 234

3 Reading lamps* 98

4 Coupe: glass roof, electric* 39

5 Interior lamps 98

6 Passenger airbag status lamp 91

7 Control Display 16

8 Driving stability control systems

> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83

> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 84

9 Hazard warning flashers

10 Central locking system 32

11 Automatic climate control

12 CD/DVD drive* 144

13 Selecting AM or FM waveband

14 Changing the audio and entertainment sources

15 Changing

> Radio station 147

> Track 155

17 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions

18 Buttons on the controller 17 Selecting menus directly

19 Programmable memory keys 21

20 Switching entertainment audio sources on/ off and adjusting volume 144

21 Ejecting a CD/DVD* 155

Air distribution to the windshield 100

Air distribution to the upper body area 100

Air distribution to the footwell 100

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 100

Cooling function 101

Automatic recirculated air control AUC and recirculated air mode 101

Maximum cooling 100

ALL program 101

Air volume 101

Defrosting windows 101

Rear window defroster 101

Heated seats* 50

16 Convertible: open convertible top 41

Convertible: closing the convertible top 41

iD ri

ve

16

iDrive

The concept iDrive integrates the functions of a large num- ber of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position.

Make entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherwise, you may

endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Controls at a glance

Controls

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons You can use the buttons to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

> Move in four directions, arrows 3

> Turn, arrow 4

> Push, arrow 5

A t

a g

la n

ce

17

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Control Display

Notes > Follow care instructions when cleaning the

Control Display.

> Do not store items in the region in front of the Control Display; doing so may damage the Control Display.

Switching off 1. Press the OPTION button.

2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller to switch on.

Buttons on the controller

Operating principle With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 57, the following message is dis- played on the Control Display:

To hide the message: Press the controller. The main menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Symbol Function

MENU Open the main menu

RADIO Open the Radio menu

CD Open the CD/Multimedia menu

NAV Start navigation in map view

TEL Open the Telephone menu

BACK Show previous panel

OPTION Open the Options menu

iD ri

ve

18

Selecting a menu item The menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that should be selected are depicted in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.

> Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ- ous panel is displayed. Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre- vious panel. This does not close the current panel.

> Move the controller to the right.

A new panel is opened and laid over it.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi- cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When you open a menu, generally the panel last selected in this menu is displayed. To display the first panel of the menu:

> Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.

> Press the menu's button twice on the con- troller.

Open the Options menu

Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

Another possibility: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.

Options menu The "Options" menu is composed of different areas:

> Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".

The region remains unchanged.

> Control options for the selected main menu, e.g. "Radio".

> Other control options for the selected menu, e.g. "Store station".

A t

a g

la n

ce

19

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Adjusting settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

Activating/deactivating functions Some menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated.

The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

Status box The status box at the top right displays the fol- lowing information:

> Time

> Current entertainment source

> Sound output ON/OFF

> Mobile phone network with strongest reception

> Telephone status

> Traffic reports reception

Status box symbols The symbols are divided into separate groups.

iD ri

ve

20

Radio symbols

Telephone symbols

Entertainment symbols

Other

With the Professional navigation system: Split screen

General information Additional information, e.g. from the computer, can be displayed on the right side of the split screen.

This information remains visible on the split screen even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting display

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected.

4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content".

5. Select the desired menu item.

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins* switched on

HD radio* switched on

Satellite radio* switched on

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call* Missed call* Reception strength of mobile phone network* symbol flashing: network search

No mobile phone network avail- able* Bluetooth* switched on

Roaming* active

Receiving text message*, email* Checking SIM card* SIM card* blocked

SIM card* missing

Entering PIN*

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD* player

Music collection* Gracenote database* AUX-IN port

USB audio interface* Mobile phone audio interface*

Symbol Meaning

Voice instructions* switched off

Query current vehicle position*

A t

a g

la n

ce

21

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Programmable memory keys

General information iDrive functions can be stored on the program- mable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Storing functions 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button ... for longer than two seconds.

Executing a function Press the ... button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying memory key assignments Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

> Displaying brief information: press the but- ton.

> Displaying detailed information: press and hold the button.

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select the letters or

numbers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3. "OK": confirm entry.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Switching between uppercase and lowercase letters Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering uppercase letters and lower- case letters:

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete one letter or number

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers

Enter a blank space

Symbol Function

Entering letters

Entering numbers

Symbol Function

Move the controller toward the front: to switch from uppercase letters to lower- case letters

Move the controller toward the front: to switch from low- ercase letters to uppercase letters

iD ri

ve

22

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

> During entry, only letters for which there are data are offered.

> Destination search: town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

A t

a g

la n

ce

23

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Voice activation system

The concept > The voice activation system can be used to

control functions by spoken commands.

> Functions that can only used when the vehi- cle is stopped cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

> The system includes a special microphone on the driver's side.

> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates com- mands for the voice activation system.

> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the answers from the voice activation system.

Prerequisite On the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system to permit identification of the commands to be spoken.

Setting the language, refer to page 81.

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the acoustic signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal notify you that the voice activa- tion system is activated.

If no additional commands are possible, con- tinue by operating the function via iDrive.

Finishing voice input Press the button on the steering wheel or

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

The available commands depend on which menu is currently selected on the Control Dis- play.

There are short commands for functions of the main menu.

Some list entries, e.g. phone book entries*, can likewise be selected using the voice activation system. Make sure to say list entries the same way as they appear in the respective list.

Having the possible commands read aloud To have the available commands read aloud:

For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis- played, the commands relating to settings are read aloud.

Performing functions using short commands Functions from the main menu can be per- formed directly by means of short commands, regardless of which menu item is selected, e.g. {Vehicle status}.

List of short command of the voice activation system, refer to page 247.

*

{Cancel}

{Voice commands}

V o

ic e

ac ti

va ti

o n

s ys

te m

24

Help dialog for voice activation system Accessing help:

Other commands* for the help dialog:

> {Help with examples}: information about the current control options and the most important commands relating to them are read aloud.

> {Help with voice activation}: information about the principle operation of the voice activation system is read aloud.

Example: playing back a CD 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio

output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

4. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system uses the stan- dard dialog or a short version.

In the short version of the voice dialog, the responses from the system are given in abbre- viated form.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting.

Adjusting volume Turn the volume knob during the spoken instruction to select the desired volume.

> The volume remains the same, even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

> The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini- tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa- tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 234, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.

Ambient conditions > Say the commands, numbers and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always speak the commands in the lan- guage of the voice activation system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.

{Help}

3. {C D and multimedia}

The system plays the last media played.

5. {C D track } e.g. CD track 4.

A t

a g

la n

ce

25

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof*/pan- oramic glass roof* closed to prevent inter- ference from ambient noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for

driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

28

Opening and closing

Remote control

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort Access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 37.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per- sonal Profile, next column.

In addition, information about service require- ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 221.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Driver's door, refer to page 32

> Convertible: glove compartment, refer to page 107

New remote controls Your BMW center can supply new remote con- trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Personal Profile

The concept You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro- file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the set- tings stored for it are called up and imple- mented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maxi- mum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access* is in use.

Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

> Programming the Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21

> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 32

> Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat posi- tion, refer to page 50

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 66

C o

n tr

o ls

29

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> Settings for the display on the Control Dis- play and in the instrument cluster:

> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 76

> Date format, refer to page 78

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 81

> Language of the Control Display, refer to page 81

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 74

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con- trol PDC, refer to page 82

> Light settings:

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 94

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 95

> Daytime running lights, refer to page 95

> High-beam Assistant*, refer to page 96

> Automatic climate control: activating/deac- tivating AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated air control, set- ting temperature, air volume and distribu- tion, refer to page 100 ff

> Entertainment:

> Tone control, refer to page 144

> Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 144

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Trunk lid

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside > Via the remote control

> Via the door lock* > In cars with Comfort Access*, via the han-

dles on the driver's and front passenger doors

In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps*, interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The alarm system* is also armed or disarmed. For further details on the alarm system*, refer to page 34.

Operating from inside By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 32.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- rior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: Using the remote control

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

Convertible: to operate the convertible top with the remote control, the doors and

trunk lid must be closed and the cargo area par- tition must be folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 42.<

Unlocking Press the button. The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.

Setting unlocking characteristics You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

30

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

5. Press the controller.

Coupe: convenient opening Press and hold the button. The windows and the glass roof* are opened.

Convertible: convenient opening* When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to open the convertible top and windows.

Hold the button down. The windows and the convertible topare opened provided that the doors are closed.

If you continue pressing the button, the win- dows move up.

Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the button interrupts the opening process.<

Locking Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Convertible: convenient closing* When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to close the convertible top and windows.

Press and hold the button. The convertible top and the windows are closed.

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the button interrupts the closing process.<

Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Unlocking the trunk lid Press the button for about 1 second and then release it.

The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

The trunk lid swings backward and up when opened. Make sure that adequate

clearance is available before opening. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is locked again after closing. Before and after each trip, check that the trunk lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<

Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

C o

n tr

o ls

31

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

4. Press the controller.

Calling up the driver's seat position The driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select whether or not the seat is reset to that position automatically.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up 1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Last seat position auto."

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis- charged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 28. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 37.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

32

Opening and closing: Using the door lock

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 29.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Coupe In vehicles without an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, only the driver's door

can be locked via the door lock.<

To lock both doors, the fuel filler flap and the trunk lid together:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking sys- tem in the interior, refer to page 32.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas- senger door, refer to page 33.

3. Lock the vehicle.

> Lock the driver's door using the inte- grated key in the door lock, or

> press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Convenient opening and closing* Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, you can also operate the windows and glass roof* via the door lock.

Convertible: you can operate the windows and convertible top via the door lock.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

During each closing procedure, and when opening the convertible top, watch the

process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera- tion.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit posi- tions in the door lock.

Opening and closing: From inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking You can also set the situations in which the car locks:

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select the desired function:

> "Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle after a short time if no door has been opened.

> "Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.

C o

n tr

o ls

33

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

Trunk lid In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the

trunk lid.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung upward.

In the event of a malfunction, please con- tact your BMW center or a workshop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.<

Locking or unlocking separately

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the trunk lid

2 Unlocking the trunk lid

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

34

Locking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.

The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system.

If you give the remote control without the inte- grated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet park- ing, for example. Locking the glove compart- ment, refer to page 107.

Unlocking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is unlocked.

Closing

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result.<

Alarm system*

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened

> To movements inside the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 35

> When the car's inclination changes, e.g. if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away: tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 35

> When there has been an interruption of power supply from the battery

Depending on the market-specific version, the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by:

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on* the hazard warning flashers

Arming and disarming When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the trunk lid using the button of the remote control even if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 30. The lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off an alarm > Unlock the car with the remote control, refer

to page 29, or

> insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

C o

n tr

o ls

35

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp under the inside rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or trunk lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.

> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor

Coupe In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass roof* must be completely closed.

Convertible The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. This way, the anti- theft alarm system including the interior motion

sensor are armed, even if the convertible top is open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may trig- ger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre- vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In duplex garages

> During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.

Comfort Access* Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehi- cle without needing to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre- sponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Unlocking the trunk lid separately

> Engine starting

> Convenient closing

Functional requirement > The vehicle or the trunk lid can only be

locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

36

> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control cur- rently in use is inside the vehicle.

Comparison to the standard remote control In general, there is no difference between using Comfort Access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions men- tioned above. You should therefore first famil- iarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28.

Special features regarding the use of Comfort Access are described below.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or the

convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec- essary.<

Unlocking

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas- senger door completely, arrow 1. This corre- sponds to pressing the button.

Locking Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical

consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.<

Coupe: convenient closing For Convenient closing, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.

Convertible: window and convertible top operation With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote con- trol has been accidentally left inside the

locked vehicle after the trunk lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the Start/Stop button, refer to page 57.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; otherwise, the engine will start immedi-

ately.<

Starting the engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 57.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission* The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 58. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Malfunctions Comfort Access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open and close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine

C o

n tr

o ls

37

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con- tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 28.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac- ing up.

4. Press the cover on to close.

Take the old battery to a recycling center or to your BMW center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.

Take the remote control out of the ignition when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the electric windows and possi- bly injure themselves.<

Coupe: opening, closing

> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing Window operation with Comfort Access, refer also to page 30.

To close the side windows while driving, either close the rear windows first or all

four windows together; otherwise, the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

38

Individually

> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.

Jointly

> Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.

> Pull the switch: All windows close as long as you pull the switch.

After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Convenient opening and closing For information on Convenient opening and closing via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on Con- venient closing with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 36.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a power window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path

prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc- tions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories that might inter- fere with window movement. Otherwise, the pinch protection system could be impaired. Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<

Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win- dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win- dows normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

C o

n tr

o ls

39

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Coupe: glass roof*, electric To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Tilting Press the switch.

> The closed glass roof is tilted and the slid- ing visor opens slightly.

Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the tilted position, as this would

damage the mechanism.<

Opening, closing > Press the switch backwards to the resis-

tance point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.

> Press the switch backwards past the resis- tance point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on Convenient opening and closing via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on Con- venient closing with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 36.

After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur- ing closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the tilted position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior

to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would con- tinue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

40

Closing manually* In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually:

1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227.

2. On both sides, use the screwdriver to press on the clip inside the opening.

3. Remove the control unit.

4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.

5. Insert the Allen wrench* supplied with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227, into the opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.

6. Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the control unit.

Convertible: convertible top The fully automatic top combines reliable weather protection with simple and easy-to- use operation.

The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your Convertible:

> It is recommended that you close the con- vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked. The closed convertible top not only pro- tects the vehicle interior from damage due to unforeseen bad weather, but also pro- vides a certain degree of protection against theft. However, even when the top is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo area.

> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the convertible top.

> If the top is opened while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo area. If necessary, remove items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.

At temperatures below +147/106, do not move the convertible top as this could

result in damage. Do not keep the convertible top in the convert- ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet; otherwise, the moisture may cause damage. Do not place objects on the convertible top, as otherwise they may fall off when you operate the convertible top and cause damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the roll- over protection system is in the activated posi-

C o

n tr

o ls

41

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

tion. Always completely finish the operation of the convertible top. Driving with the convertible top incompletely opened or closed can result in damage or injury. Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure. Keep children away from the opening/closing path of the con- vertible top. For safety reasons, only operate the convertible top while the vehicle is standing.<

While opening and closing, the convert- ible top pivots upward. When operating

the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge, etc., ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in/2 m of headroom; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.<

Before opening and closing > Comply with the safety precautions

described above.

> Ensure that the cargo area partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 110; otherwise, it will not be possible to open the convertible top.

> Ensure that the cargo does not press against the cargo area partition from below.

> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.

Opening and closing Convertible top operation with Comfort Access, refer also to page 30.

As of radio readiness, refer to page 57:

To conserve battery power, if possible operate the convertible top only while the

engine is running. Prior to closing the convertible top, check for and remove all debris from the windshield frame; otherwise, the closing of the top may be hampered.<

1 Push button: closing the convertible top

2 Push button: open convertible top

3 LEDs

The side windows move down when the convertible top is opened.<

Operating while driving You can open or close the convertible top while driving, as long as the car is not moving faster than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is moving, the procedure is interrupted.

While operating the convertible top, pay close attention to the surrounding traffic;

otherwise, an accident may happen. Try to avoid operating the convertible top while reversing the vehicle since the rear view is very limited during the convertible top's movement. Do not operate the convertible top while driving in windy conditions. Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, damage to the vehicle can occur.<

LEDs > While the convertible top is being operated,

the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.

In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:

> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

42

> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the button is pressed, the cargo area partition is raised, the trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunction. The convertible top cannot be moved.

Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for the convertible top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the buttons.

If the opening or closing procedure is inter- rupted for an extended period, the convertible top remains in the raised position for approx. 10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top which is not completely open or closed is hazardous.<

If the convertible top is not fully opened or closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened

and the windows cannot be moved.<

Convenient opening and closing with remote control or via door lock Refer to pages 30 and 32.

Closing manually Only close the convertible top manually if it is absolutely necessary. Never open it

manually. The convertible top box cover cannot be locked if there is an electrical defect and would then open while the vehicle is in motion. Incorrect handling can result in damage.<

Closing the convertible top manually should be performed by two people. The rear seats must not be occupied.

Before closing 1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Take the screwdriver out of the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227.

3. If the convertible top is locked, release the two button in the cargo area, arrows 1, using the screwdriver and pull forcefully all the way out. The convertible top box cover is unlocked.

4. Close the trunk lid. After manually releasing the convertible top box cover, it is no longer possible to open the trunk lid.

Closing 1. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.

2. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible top box cover all the way, arrow 3.

3. The locking pins must have engaged com- pletely. If they are still visible: close the con- vertible top box cover as far as necessary until the locking bolts engage audibly, then slowly open the cover. During this process, do not close the convertible top box cover completely.

C o

n tr

o ls

43

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Lift out the front part of the convertible top, arrows 4, on both sides and swing it for- ward. At the same time keep the convertible top box cover from closing, e.g. using your shoulder.

5. Position the rear convertible top frame upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear convertible top frame.

6. Together with another person, press down the front convertible top frame from the out- side and on both sides as far as possible.

7. Carefully remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame using a pointed object. Take the Allen wrench out of the onboard literature pouch.

8. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the opening provided.

9. Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left, arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top frame is automatically pressed down onto the convertible top box cover and is sealed tight under tension.

The closing procedure must be fully com- pleted; otherwise, injury or damage may

occur.<

Please contact your BMW center to have the cause of the malfunction eliminated.

Wind deflector* With the convertible top open, the wind deflec- tor keeps air movement in the passenger com- partment to a minimum, thus providing you with a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.

Installation 1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-

tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.

2. Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

44

3. Position both locking pins of one side at the openings provided for them.

4. Press the wind deflector into the openings, arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the springs, and push the free locking pin in the same direction, arrow 4.

5. Position the free locking pins at the corre- sponding openings and let the spring ten- sion lock the wind deflector in place, arrow 5.

6. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec- tor, arrow 6.

With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if

the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.<

Removing the wind deflector Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal- lation.

Folding

Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.

C o

n tr

o ls

45

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Adjustments

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- junction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys- tems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 54.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing should come between the airbags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air- bag deploys. Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise, serious injuries can result if the airbag deploys.<

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 90.

Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 48.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag- ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other- wise, the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and reg- ularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Safety belts, refer to page 50.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

46

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 48, and on damaged safety belts on page 51.

Manual adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop- erly.

Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back- rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Tilt*

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support*

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for- ward or back.

C o

n tr

o ls

47

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Electrical adjustment* Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints on page 48.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.

> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width*

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat- eral-support pads.

Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accord- ingly.

Longitudinal adjustment from outside/ behind*

To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

48

Head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat; otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.<

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Front seats

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing 1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Rear seats

Coupe: height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Convertible: raising and lowering Only lower the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Raise all low-

ered head restraints before transporting pas- sengers in the rear.<

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.

Removing 1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

C o

n tr

o ls

49

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Coupe: folding head restraint down and up*

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may contain foldable head restraints.

Folding down: Press the button, arrow 1.

Folding up: Pull the head restraint.

Only fold down the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Fold up the

head restraints again before transporting pas- sengers in the rear.<

Seat with manual longitudinal adjustment

Easy entry The easy entry feature includes a memory func- tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back- rest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.

2. Push the seat forward.

Previous position Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.

When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured

and that no objects are damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and back- rests so that they are locked in place. Other- wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex- pected movement.<

Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment

Easy entry The easy entry feature includes a memory func- tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back- rest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.

2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.

Previous position Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.

When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are

damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and back- rests so that they are locked in place. Other- wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex- pected movement.<

A d

ju st

m en

ts

50

Heated seats*

Press the button once per temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off: Press button longer.

If you continue driving within approx. the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.

Seat and mirror memory* You can store and call up two different combi- nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror posi- tions.

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup- port are not stored in memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

Call-up Do not call up the memory while you are driving; otherwise, unexpected seat

movement could result in an accident.<

Comfort function 1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio readiness, refer to page 57.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off, refer to page 57.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Safety belts Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

C o

n tr

o ls

51

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Closing Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- erly, refer to page 46.

Opening 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for front seats The indicator lamps light up and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Dis- play. Check whether the safety belt

has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas- tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front passenger safety belt has not been fastened, if there are objects on the front passenger seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-

tem, including any belt tensioners or child restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is

not guaranteed that the safety devices will func- tion properly.<

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The front passenger's mirror is more con- vex than the driver's mirror. The objects

seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an acci- dent.<

1 Adjustments

2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*

3 Folding mirrors in and out* The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use*. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.

Manual adjustment The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out* At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/ 20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar- row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that have been folded in fold out automatically at a speed of approx. 24 mph/40 km/h.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

52

Automatic heating Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Passenger-side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor*

Activating 1. Push the switch to the position for the

driver's side mirror, arrow 1.

2. Shift into reverse or move the selector lever into the R position. The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.

Deactivating Push the switch to the position for the passen- ger side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head- lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion; otherwise, there

is a risk of an accident due to unexpected move- ment.<

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi- tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.

C o

n tr

o ls

53

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Steering wheel heating*

Press the button.

The LED in the button lights up when the steer- ing wheel heating is switched on.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

54

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger

themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Children should always sit in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only

in the rear in suitable child restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth- erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Children in the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas- senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child restraint system.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 91.

Installing child restraint systems

Observe the child restraint system manu- facturer's instructions when selecting,

installing and using child restraint systems. Otherwise, the protective effect may be dimin- ished. <

Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly

or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front and side airbags for the front passen- ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<

Seat position Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Backrest width* The backrest width of the front passenger seat must be at its widest possible set-

ting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stabil- ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set- ting, refer to page 47.

2. Install the child seat.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child restraint systems.

C o

n tr

o ls

55

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To lock the safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren.

To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and

safety instructions provided by the manufac- turer of the system; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system.

Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child

restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Coupe: rear seats

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protec- tive caps.

Convertible: rear seats

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Upper LATCH retaining strap

Convertible For Canadian Customers Only.

The following statement is required by Trans- port Canada.

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir- ing the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

56

Coupe Use the top tether anchors to secure child restraint systems only; otherwise, the

anchors could be damaged.<

For child restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

Coupe Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not

twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other- wise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Rear window shelf

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys- tem

If necessary, fold the head restraints upward before use.

1. Push the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.

3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.

4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

C o

n tr

o ls

57

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

> Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Comfort Access* If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 35.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause

damage.<

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.

> The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Automatic transmission* You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.

Manual transmission: if you press the Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,

the engine starts. Automatic transmission and Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: if you press the Start/Stop button and depress the brake pedal, the engine starts.<

Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are dis- played in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> In cars with Comfort Access*, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 36

Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electri-

cal consumers in order to preserve the bat- tery.<

D ri

vi n

g

58

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis- plays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine Do not run the engine in enclosed areas; otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehi- cle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from mov- ing.<

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the cat- alytic converter.<

Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 35.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 35.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 35.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine starts independent of the current transmission position.

Switching off the engine Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking, apply the parking brake force- fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<

Manual transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/

Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

4. Removing the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 57.

Automatic transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

C o

n tr

o ls

59

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

4. Removing the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 57.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/

Stop button. If the transmission is shifted into N when the engine is switched off, you will be notified visually and acoustically of this fact.

2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

3. Remove remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 57. The transmission is automatically shifted into transmission position P.

Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off a signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do

not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con- tinuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally apply the parking

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the park- ing brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,

the engine could be damaged if you inadvert- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse gear Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic* In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 61.

D ri

vi n

g

60

Vehicle parking To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the

parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Disengaging the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 57.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed and, in manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.

Changing selector lever positions > With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag- ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The transmission locks to prevent the drive wheels from turning.

R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con- sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi- tion D.

Kickdown Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full- throttle resistance point.

C o

n tr

o ls

61

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.

To deactivate the sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting gears via the selector lever Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot: When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.

The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad- dle .

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Overriding selector lever lock If the selector lever will not move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

D ri

vi n

g

62

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227, press the red lever, see arrow, while moving the selector lever to the desired position.

7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch*

The concept The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch is an automated manual trans- mission with two clutches and secondary gear sets in which the clutching and shifting is han- dled by an electrohydraulic system. With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch, the gears are shifted without an interruption in driving power.

You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic trans- mission with double clutch using the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

It offers you the following functions:

> Either manual or automatic mode: sequen- tial mode or drive mode

> Automatic downshifting and protection against incorrect gear selection, even in sequential mode

> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control, refer to page 66

> Automatic intermediate throttle application

System limitations The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch has an overheating protection that protects the clutch from extreme loads.

The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if the transmission becomes too warm. Avoid high engine loads and frequent

accelerations from zero. If the transmission is overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It is only possible to continue driving once the transmission has cooled down.

Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis- sion to overheat.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

The selector lever position and the engaged gear are displayed, e.g. M4.

Engaging selector lever positions > The selector lever can be moved out of

position P only with the engine running: interlock.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not be executed: shiftlock.

C o

n tr

o ls

63

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Shifting into N, D, R

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, overcoming a resistance point if nec- essary. When shifting out of P or into R, simul- taneously press the button 1.

The engaged selector lever position is also dis- played on the selector lever.

When you release the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Shifting into P

Press the button P.

P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

The transmission is shifted into P if, with the engine running, you open the driver's

door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.<

The transmission is shifted into P as soon as you switch off the engine, unless the

transmission is in N and the remote control is in the ignition lock, refer to page 57. As soon as

you remove the remote control from the ignition lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<

R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

After the engine is switched off, the trans- mission remains in N if you leave the

remote control in the ignition lock. You can use this function at a car wash, for example, refer to page 224.<

D Drive mode In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.

Kickdown For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as passing, depress the accelerator past the resis- tance point. This provides maximum accelera- tion.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Push selector lever toward the left from the selector lever position D, the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style. The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.

D ri

vi n

g

64

The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch does the thinking for you:

> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combina- tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that could cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

> At a stop, the transmission is automatically shifted down to the first gear.

> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear- dependent minimum speed, the transmis- sion automatically downshifts without your intervention.

Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode, you can skip over several gears in order to achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so, depress the accelerator past the resistance point.

To return to automatic mode, push the selector lever to the right.

Gear shifting Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your foot off the accelerator when doing so.

Using the selector lever > To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the

rear.

> To downshift, push it toward the front.

Using the shift paddles on the steering wheel You can also shift manually using two shift pad- dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode if the selector lever is in position D.

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad- dle .

Driving dynamics control The driving dynamics control permits you, at the push of a button, to have your BMW react in an even more sporty fashion when driving:

> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed range.

> Gear changes occur more quickly.

> The engine reacts more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements.

Activating the system

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button lights up.

Deactivating the system > Press the SPORT button again

> Switch off the engine

C o

n tr

o ls

65

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The LED in the button goes out.

Manually unlocking parking lock In the event of a power supply interrup- tion such as a discharged or discon-

nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the parking lock must be manually unlocked; other- wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the vehicle cannot be towed.<

Only unlock the parking lock manually for tow- ing and make sure to set the parking brake forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle is parked.

Releasing 1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit, refer to page 227, rotate the cover until it reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Insert allen wrench into the opening, arrow 1.

5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.

Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo- site direction; otherwise, you may

damage the mechanism.<

6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.

After parking the vehicle, lock the parking lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger

that the vehicle will roll.<

Locking 1. Press the button, see arrow.

The parking lock is locked again.

2. Replace cover again.

3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into place.

4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Jump-starting and towing, starting on page 235.

D ri

vi n

g

66

Launch Control Launch Control enables an optimum accelera- tion when starting off on a road surface with good traction.

Do not use Launch Control too often; oth- erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-

cle will lead to premature component wear.<

Launch Control is ready for use when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted travel of at least 6.2 miles/10 km.

1. With the engine running, step on the brake with your left foot.

2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC), refer to page 84.

3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to page 64.

4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the manual mode and select 1st gear.

5. With your right foot, push the accelerator pedal past the resistance point. The engine speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.

6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi- cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal floored.

7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed past the resistance point.

Launch Control will be ready for use again after you drive a certain distance.

Launch Control is not available for use during the break-in phase, refer to page 116.

To maintain driving stability, keep DSC activated whenever possible.<

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signal

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp and the turn signals indicates that

one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.<

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to signal a turn.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

C o

n tr

o ls

67

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-

sitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system switches to operation in the inter- mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain

sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn the thumb wheel 5.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before enter- ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do

so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps* Pull the lever, arrow 4. Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage the washer pump.<

D ri

vi n

g

68

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically* while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Washer fluid Washer fluid is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition sources and

only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the container.<

Washer fluid filler neck Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine

parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.<

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure

the correct concentration is maintained.<

Capacity Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept You can use the cruise control feature begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse

conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat- ing

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler- ating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Resuming a previously stored speed

Maintaining current speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and main- tained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

If the engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the engine output is insufficient.

C o

n tr

o ls

69

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Increasing speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Each time the lever is pressed briefly, the speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Accelerating using the lever Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2,until the desired speed is reached. The functions here are the same as for increas- ing the speed or accelerating, except that the speed will be decreased.

Deactivating cruise control Push the lever briefly upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:

> When the brakes are applied.

> When the clutch of the manual transmission is engaged or the transmission is shifted into neutral.

> When the automatic transmission selector lever is moved into the neutral position N.

> When the selector lever of the Sports auto- matic transmission with double clutch is moved into the neutral position N.

> When the vehicle travels faster or slower than the set speed for an extended period, e.g. when the accelerator is depressed.

> When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated.

> When DSC is intervening

Resuming a previously stored speed Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed is resumed and main- tained.

The stored speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling is stored or when a stored speed is called up, the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

70

Controls overview

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature and clock

3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster > To reset the trip odometer while the ignition

is switched on

> To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to Units of mea- sure on page 74.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Time, outside temperature display Setting the time, refer to page 76.

Outside temperature warning When the displayed temperature falls to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should there-

fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting the trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, outside tem- perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni- tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

C o

n tr

o ls

71

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Engine oil temperature*

When the engine is at normal operating temper- ature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/ 1506.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes- sage appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gal/53 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 206.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.

Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the remaining cruising range is dis- played on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message appears continuously in the Control Display.

With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner- ing, engine functions are not always assured.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

Calling up information

Press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever.

The following items of information are dis- played in the order listed:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption

> No information

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 74.

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

72

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

It is important that you refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls

below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func- tions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, refer to page 73, you can have the average speed for another trip dis- played.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

With the trip computer, refer to page 73, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini- mum exhaust emissions.

Displays on the Control Display The computer can also be opened via iDrive.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displaying "Onboard info":

> Cruising range

> Distance from destination

> Estimated time of arrival if a destination has been entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 125.

Displaying "Trip computer":

> Departure time

> Trip duration

> Trip distance

Both displays show:

> The average speed and

> the average fuel consumption.

C o

n tr

o ls

73

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

1. Select the respective menu entry.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the trip computer You can reset all values:

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset"

Settings and information

Operating principle

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set val- ues

> Calling up computer information 71

3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 98

4 Calling up Check Control 78

5 Checking oil level 217

6 Setting the time 76

7 Setting the date 78

8 Viewing service requirement display 74

Exiting displays The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

74

Units of measure You can change the units for fuel consumption, route/distance, temperature and pressure.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by

your BMW Service Advisor.<

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE- INFO".

3. Press button 2.

4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

C o

n tr

o ls

75

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting functions

2 Service requirements

3 Engine oil

4 Roadworthiness test* 5 Front brake pads

6 Rear brake pads

7 Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

More information

Detailed information on service requirements You can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please

schedule a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

76

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 78; other- wise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Ser- vice CBS is not ensured.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

6. "Date:"

7. Create the settings.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 221.

Automatic Service Request* Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.

You can check when your BMW center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Options"

4. "Last Service Request"

Clock The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the time format on page 77.

C o

n tr

o ls

77

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

7. Press button 2. The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive 1. Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. "Settings"

Setting the time 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is stored.

Setting time zone* 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:"

4. Select desired time zone.

The time zone is stored.

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

78

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

6. Press button 2. The system stores the new date.

Via iDrive 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed, and press the controller.

5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys- tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes- sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circum- stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes- sages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

C o

n tr

o ls

79

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. These Check Control messages can be viewed again later, refer to page 79.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplemental text messages You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control.

The text of urgent messages is displayed auto- matically.

To exit the display: Select "OK" and press the Controller.

Symbols* Depending on the Check Control message, you can select from among the following functions in the supplementary text messages.

> "Service request" Contact your BMW center.

> "Roadside Assistance" Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal/high beam lever.

> Some Check Control messages are dis- played continuously and remain visible until the malfunction has been rectified. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this, they are displayed again automatically.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

> Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK".

C o

n tr

o ls

o ve

rv ie

w

80

2. Press button 2. "CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control mes- sage has been stored, the corresponding lamp lights up. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.

Via iDrive 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Speed limit You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed.

5. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed"

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

C o

n tr

o ls

81

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Press the controller.

Settings on the Control Display

Language on the Control Display

Setting the language 1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

1. "Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

5. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visi- ble.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

82

Technology for driving comfort and safety

Park Distance Control PDC*

The concept The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicatorwarn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in the bumper measure the distance.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth- erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Switching off automatically After approx. 150 ft/50 m of driving or approx. 20 mph/30 km/h of speed, the system switches off and the LED goes out.

Signal tones When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis- tance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin- uous tone sounds.

An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> If you stop in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors

> If you are driving parallel to a wall

Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. PDC is malfunction- ing. A message appears on the Con-

trol Display. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.

PDC with visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis- play before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limitations Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also sub- ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out- side or inside the car can drown out the PDC

C o

n tr

o ls

83

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; oth- erwise, there is a risk of personal injury or prop- erty damage.<

Driving stability control systems Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 118.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Dynamic Brake Control DBC When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel- erate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the indi- vidual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument panel. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

In the same way as with a differential interlock*, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a signifi- cant loss of traction.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.

For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC controls the driving and braking forces.

If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed.

The indicator lamp lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument panel: DSC is deactivated.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

84

Dynamic Traction Control DTC DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in the instrument panel.

For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC con- trols the driving and braking forces.

If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed.

The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC- TION is displayed in the instrument panel: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.

Drive-off assistant The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.

2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the

brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.<

Flat Tire Monitor FTM*

The concept The system does not measure the actual infla- tion pressure in the tires.

The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individ- ual wheels while moving.

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre- sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement The system must have been initialized while the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor- rected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reinitialize the system.

System limitations Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

The system will not detect a natural, uniform pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

C o

n tr

o ls

85

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Driving with snow chains*

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla- tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine do not drive away.

5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset".

6. Start driving.

The initialization is completed during driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically.<

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or a major

loss in tire pressure.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stabil- ity Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires With a damaged tire, is possible to continue driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

86

If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor- rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehi- cle while driving.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, out- side temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steer- ing response will change.<

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce

your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth- erwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*

The concept Check the inflation pressure in the four installed tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif- icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement The system must have been reset while the inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli- able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been

changed, reset the system.<

System limitations Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

The system does not function correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pres- sures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire:

> When a wheel without TPM electronics is installed.

> Interference with TPM by other systems or devices with the same transmission fre- quency.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

C o

n tr

o ls

87

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Status indicator on the Control Display The color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system.

A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account.

A correction is only required when this is indi- cated by the TPM.

Green wheels The inflation pressure corresponds to the desired state.

"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.

One wheel yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres- sure in the indicated tire.

All wheels yellow > There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire

pressure in several tires.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Gray wheels The system cannot detect a puncture.

Reasons for this may be:

> TPM is being reset.

> Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency.

> Malfunction.

Resetting the system Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor- rected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine do not drive away.

5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting "Reset".

6. Start driving.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting continues automati- cally.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting, all tires on the Control Display

are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is displayed.<

Message for low tire inflation pressure The warning lamps light up in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds.

> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated wheel.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

When a low tire pressure is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

88

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

If the inflation pressure is correct in all four tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. The system must then be reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehi- cle while driving.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, out- side temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steer- ing response will change.<

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate complete failure of the tire.

Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<

Message for unsuccessful system reset

Yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis- play.

The system has detected a wheel change, but was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible at the current inflation pressures.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 87.

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu- ously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow.The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display. No punctures can be detected.

Display in the following situations:

> A wheel without TPM electronics has been installed: Have it checked by your BMW center.

> Malfunction Have the system checked.

> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to com- plete the resetting process. Reset the sys- tem again.

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu- ously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow.The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display.

Display in the following situations:

Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency. The system auto- matically becomes active again when the vehi- cle moves out of the interference zone.

C o

n tr

o ls

89

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif- icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin- flation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering*

The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move- ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very direct and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced as the speed increases. This improves the handling of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 83.

Malfunction The warning lamps come on. Active steering is malfunctioning or is tem- porarily deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements

are required, whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau- tiously and think well ahead.

Deactivation Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini- tialization. A message indicates that the feature is deactivated. Initialization may take several minutes.

If the message does not disappear during the current trip, have the system checked.

Defect If there is a defect, a corresponding text mes- sage appears. Have the system checked.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

90

Servotronic*

The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels relative to the vehi- cle speed. At low speeds, the steering force is strongly assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering. As the vehicle speed increases, the steering assisting power is reduced.

This system functions automatically.

Malfunctions The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. Servotronic is malfunctioning or has

failed. Steering response will be different. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the sys- tem checked as soon as possible.

Brake Force Display*

On the left: normal braking. On the right: sharp braking.

When the rear fog lamps* are switched on, the Brake Force Display is not active and the illumi- nated area for normal braking is reduced by approximately half.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Coupe: head airbags

3 Side airbags in the seat backrests

4 Convertible: knee airbags

Protective action Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags have been designed to not be trig- gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with

C o

n tr

o ls

91

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components imme- diately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warning notices and information about the air- bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags An analysis of the impression in the front pas- senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air- bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status

of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger air- bags below.<

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau-

tions and handling instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 54.

The front and side airbags can also be deacti- vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer- tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the rele- vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Other- wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<

Status of front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags shows the functional status of the front passenger front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint sys- tem is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, This particularly applies to

child seats that were required by NHTSA at the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indi- cator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

92

detected and that the front passenger air- bags are deactivated.<

> The indicator lamp does not come on when, for example, a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

As of radio readiness, refer to page 57, the warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up at radio

readiness or beyond.

> Warning lamp remains permanently on.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay; otherwise,

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci- dent occurs.<

Convertible: rollover protection system The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a crit- ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.

The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.

As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection sys- tem ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.

Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on acci- dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<

Resetting If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.

1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.

2. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.

3. Release the locking lever.

4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.

C o

n tr

o ls

93

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec- tion bar.

Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.

If the rollover protective system is extended, do not operate the convertible

top. Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling. Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center. Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the sys- tem or malfunctions. To check the system and ensure flawless long- term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 74.<

L am

p s

94

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lamps off, daytime running lights

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights

2 Low beams, welcome lamps*

3 Automatic headlamp control*,daytime run- ning lights, welcome lamps*,High-beam Assistant*, Adaptive Light Control*

When you open the driver's door with the igni- tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto- matically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

With halogen headlamps: when the ignition is switched off and the switch is in position 1, only the outside sections of the rear lamps are illumi- nated, refer to page 230.

The parking lamps will discharge the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left- hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 96.<

Low-beam headlamps The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control* When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend- ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap- tive Light Control* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime run- ning lights, refer to page 95. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lights to low beams.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.<

Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

C o

n tr

o ls

95

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Pathway lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

Setting duration 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Pathway light.:"

4. Set the duration.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lights 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Adaptive Light Control*

The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

In tight curves such as on switchbacks or when turning, at speeds up to approx. 40 mph/ 70 km/h, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the area inside the curve.

Activating Adaptive Light Control With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 94.

The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.

Standstill function*: to avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light toward the front passenger side when the vehi- cle is at a standstill.

When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi- nating lamps are switched on and active on both sides.

L am

p s

96

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. The Adaptive Light Control is mal-

functioning or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps*

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps*

Roadside parking lamps, left or right* There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. 1 second, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching off Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-beam Assistant*

The concept This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit- uation allows. It handles this task for you and gives you the benefit of the best possible view. You can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the system 1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to

page 94.

2. With the low beams switched on, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever in the direction of the high beam.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high beams are activated. The system automati-

cally switches from high beams to low beams and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic, traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient lighting, e.g. on city streets.

Switching the high beams on and off manually Whenever you wish, or when the situation requires, you can intervene:

> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the high beams, but you would like to drive with the low beams, simply switch off the high beams using the turn signal/high beam lever. This deactivates the High-beam Assistant. To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the low beams, but you would like to drive with the high beams, switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and the high beams need to be switched off manually, if necessary.

C o

n tr

o ls

97

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the low beams switched on.

System limitations The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal

judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.<

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

> In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation

> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings

> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways

> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the pres- ence of highly reflective signs

> At low speeds

> When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.

> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror using a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner

Activating via iDrive 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "High beam assistant"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Fog lamps*

To switch on/off, press the button.

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps are switched off while you acti- vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

L am

p s

98

Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.

Interior lamps The interior lamps, the footwell lamps*, entry lamps*,cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lampsare set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To reduce the drain on the battery, a few minutes after the radio readiness is

switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 57, all lights in the vehicle's passenger compartment are switched off.<

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Interior lamps, front and rear*: To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per- manently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.

C o

n tr

o ls

99

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area: Draft-free ventilation 102

3 Air to the footwell

4 Air distribution, manual

5 Temperature, left side

6 Maximum cooling

7 AUTO program

8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO intensity

9 Display

10 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/ Recirculated air mode

11 Temperature, right side

12 ALL program

13 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation

14 Switching cooling function on/off manually

15 Rear window defroster

16 Seat heating*, right side 50

17 Interior temperature sensor, please keep clear

18 Seat heating*, left side 50

C lim

at e

100

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort- able for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 28.

Adjusting air distribution manually The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

footwell.

The automatic air distribution can be switched back on by pressing the AUTO button. The cooling function is switched on automatically and the manual air distribution setting is cleared.

Temperature Turn to set the desired tempera- ture.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as

quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if nec- essary, and then maintains it.

Avoid rapid switching between different tem- perature settings. The automatic climate con- trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

The system cools steadily in the lowest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air volume and recirculated air mode.

Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose.

Air is cooled as quickly as possible

> Above an outside temperature of approx. 327/06

> When the engine is running

AUTO program Press the button.

Air volume, air distribution and temperature are controlled auto-

matically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed toward the windshield, the side win- dows, the upper body and the footwell.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

At the same time, a condensation sensor con- trols the program so as to prevent window con- densation as much as possible.

The program is switched off when the air distri- bution is set manually or the button is pressed again.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto- matic control of the air volume and air distribu- tion can be adjusted:

Press the left side of the button to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to increase

it.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Convertible Program The Convertible Program is active when the convertible top is open and the AUTO program is switched on. During the Convertible Program,

C o

n tr

o ls

101

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the soft top down. In addition, the air volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.

The effectiveness of the Convertible Pro- gram can be enhanced considerably by

installing the wind deflector.<

Adjusting air volume manually To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left side of the button to reduce the air volume. Press the right side of the button to increase

it.

The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The display remains the same.

Automatic recirculated air control AUC/Recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut- ants in the immediate environment by tempo- rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated air mode and increase the air volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

The recirculated air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods;

otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.<

Via the button on the steering wheel You can switch quickly between the recircu- lated air mode and the previous mode using a buttonon the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

ALL program Press the button.

The current temperature setting on the driver's side is transferred to the front passenger side.

If the temperature setting on the driver's side is changed, the temperature on the front passen- ger side is changed as well.

The program is switched off when the setting is adjusted on the front passenger side or the but- ton is pressed again.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button.

Quickly removes ice and conden- sation from the windshield and

front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Switching cooling function on/off The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and depending on the tempera-

ture setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster Press the button.

The defroster is switched off auto- matically after a certain time.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

C lim

at e

102

Switching the system on/off

Switching off With the blower at its lowest set- ting, press the left side of the but- ton to switch off the automatic cli-

mate control.

All displays are cleared except for the rear win- dow defroster if it is switched on.

The outside air supply is blocked when the automatic climate control is switched

off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air volume.<

Switching on Press any button except the ALL or the rear window defroster button to reactivate the auto- matic climate control.

Ventilation

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the levers to change the direction of the airflow

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro- vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen- ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Parked car ventilation*

The concept The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive, refer to page 16. Two different switch-on times can be preselected.

The parked car ventilation remains switched on for approx. 30 minutes. The system can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.

The parked car ventilation system comes on if the outside temperature is above 597/156 when the switch-on time was preselected, but is ready for use at any temperature when the system is switched on directly.

The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.

Switching on and off directly 1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

C o

n tr

o ls

103

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on times 1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

5. Turn the controller: set the hours.

6. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.

8. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display lights up.

The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these

have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

104

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys- tems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans- mission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 105.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Com- ply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the radio remote control device is compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515. You can also obtain information on the Internet at: www.homelink.com. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. When starting operation for the first time: press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons are cleared.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 sec- onds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

Canada: if the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step or, if the programming by means of the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, press and hold the memory

C o

n tr

o ls

105

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

button and then press and release the but- ton on the hand-held transmitter several times, holding it for 2 seconds each time.

5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device while the ignition is switched on.

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory but- ton 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press and hold the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control for about 3 seconds.

Repeat this operation, if necessary up to three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap- idly: all stored programs are deleted.

Reassigning individual programs 1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a

distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<

2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.

If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

Canada: if the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step or, if the programming by means of the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, press and hold the memory button and then press and release the but- ton on the hand-held transmitter several times, holding it for 2 seconds each time.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

106

Digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating principle You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering

> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language

Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the com- pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre- sponding to your current location.

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

C o

n tr

o ls

107

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> An incorrect compass direction is shown.

> The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.

> Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.

3. Convertible: ensure that the convertible top is fully closed.

4. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.

5. Convertible: open the convertible top fully and repeat step 4.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering Your digital compass is factory-set to right- hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Set the language You can set the language of the display:

Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment comes on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Closing Fold the cover up.

Locking To lock the glove compartment, use the inte- grated key of the remote control, refer to page 28.

USB interface for data transmission

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections, refer to page 165.

Observe the following when connecting:

> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

108

> Do not connect USB hard discs.

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains a credit card holder and, depending on the equipment version, a compartment or a snap-in adapter*.

Opening Press the button, see arrow.

Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system:

> AUX-IN port, refer to page 166

> USB audio interface*/additional connection of the music player in the mobile phone*, refer to page 166

Storage compartments inside the vehicle Compartments are located next to the steering column*, on the doors and in the center con- sole.

Coupe: clothes hooks There are clothes hooks in the rear.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do

not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other- wise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv- ing.<

Cupholders Use lightweight and shatterproof contain- ers and do not transport hot beverages;

otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force contain- ers that are too large into the cupholders; other- wise, damage could result.<

There is one cupholder in the center console.

You can mount an attachable cupholder* on the side of the center console.

C o

n tr

o ls

109

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Ashtray*

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the

remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical appliances In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sock- ets is available. The total load of all sockets should not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket* To access the socket: Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the lighter to use the socket.

In the center console To access the socket, refer to External devices on page 166.

Coupe: through-loading system

Opening

1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area.

2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for- ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

110

Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.

When returning the backrest into the seating position, make sure that the

seat's locking mechanism is properly engaged. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around and endanger the occupants in the event of sharp braking or swerving.<

The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you with a way to attach cargo area nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 119.

Convertible: cargo loading

Enlarging the cargo area

When the convertible top is closed you can enlarge the cargo area: To do so, fold the cargo area partition upward.

Before opening the convertible top, pull the cargo area partition down until it engages.

Ensure that pointed objects do not press against the cargo area partition from below.

The convertible top can only be opened when the cargo area partition is folded

down.<

Storage compartments inside the cargo area Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the left side trim panel of the luggage compartment will contain a rubber strap* for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella.

The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you with a way to attach cargo area nets* or draw straps* for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 120.

Coupe: ski bag* The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

Loading Ensure that the skis are clean when they are loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover in the folded-down position, place the cen- ter panel underneath it.

C o

n tr

o ls

111

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.

4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag opening.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-

ter.<

Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag* The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

When using the transport bag, it is not permissible to transport passengers in

the rear seats.<

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

112

Loading 1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear

backrest up and take out the filler piece.

2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion with the backrest side facing up.

3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.

4. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag between the front seats and load it. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

Ensure that the skis are clean when you load them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the transport bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

C o

n tr

o ls

113

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Driving tips This section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

116

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consump- tion and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.

Remove any unneeded cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam- ics and increase fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass roof An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consump- tion.

Check tire inflation pressure regularly Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary.

Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.

Set off immediately Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moder- ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

117

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Drive defensively Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis- tance between you and the vehicle in front of you. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.

Avoid high engine speeds Use first gear only for driving off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con- stant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high- est applicable gear.

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel- erator and coast in a suitable gear.

The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav- ings even if standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.

Switch off functions you do not need at the moment Functions such as the air conditioner, seat heating or rear window defroster draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driv- ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.

Have the vehicle serviced Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at a BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys- tem, refer to page 221.

General driving notes

Close the trunk lid Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to do so may endanger passengers or other

road users or may damage the vehicle in the event of an accident or a braking and evasive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow into the passenger compartment.<

If special circumstances make it absolutely nec- essary to drive with the trunk open:

1. Close all windows and the glass roof.

2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto- matic climate control system, refer to page 101.

3. Drive cautiously.

Hot exhaust system In all vehicles, extremely high tempera- tures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed in its vicinity, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

118

with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin- ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini- mum tread depth on page 213.

Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Use the parking brake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the

parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater clutch wear will result.<

For more information about the drive-off assis- tant, refer to page 84.

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the movement range of the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist- ing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces- sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Down- shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans- mission, refer to page 61.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch never drive with the transmission in

neutral or with the engine switched off; other- wise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Manual transmission: never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neu- tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be impaired.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

119

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic cli- mate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. In some situations, this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<

Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they could damage the vehicle.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions may result.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the sum of the occu- pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

120

Stowing cargo

Coupe

Convertible

> Position heavy objects as low and as far for- ward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo > Secure smaller and lighter items using draw

straps*.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. To attach the cargo straps, there are two lashing eyeson the inside wall of the cargo area. Comply with the information enclosed with the load-securing devices.

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle

weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 245, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu- pants. Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 55, otherwise, these could be damaged.<

Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack* A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

Fold open the cover.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 245.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

121

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the trunk lid.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Navigation This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides

you reliably to your destination.

N av

ig at

io n

s ys

te m

124

Navigation system

General information The navigation system can determine the pre- cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel- lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Enter data only with the vehicle station- ary, and always give priority to the appli-

cable traffic regulations in the event of any con- tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.<

Navigation data

General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your BMW center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

> Depending on the data volume, a data update may take several hours.

> Update data while driving to reduce the drain on the battery.

> Only the main functions of the navigation system are available during updating.

The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption.

> You can inquire as to the status of the update.

> The data are stored in the vehicle.

> After the update, the system restarts.

> The medium that holds the navigation data can be removed after the update is com- pleted.

Information about navigation data 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Navigation system version": Information about the data version is dis- played.

Updating the navigation data

Inserting navigation DVD 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play.

3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga- tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Querying status

1. Press the button.

2. "Navigation update"

*

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

125

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 127

> Last destinations, refer to page 128

> Special destinations, refer to page 128

> Entering a destination on the map, refer to page 130

> Selecting home address, refer to page 128

> Destination entry via voice*, refer to page 131

> Destination entry via BMW Assist*, refer to page 129

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.

Entering a destination manually To make it easier to enter town/city names and street names, the system assists you with auto- matic name completion and entry comparison, refer to page 134. This makes it possible to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored town/city names and street names can be accessed quickly.

1. Press the button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of state/province and town/city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or displayed coun- try.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is reduced in steps with each entry.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

126

To delete letters:

> To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller.

> To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller for an extended period.

To enter spaces:

> Select the symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

3. Move the controller to the right.

4. Select the name of the town/city from the list.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.

2. Highlight the town/city.

3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code* 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or dis-

played city.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Select the digits.

4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.

5. Highlight the entry.

6. Select an entry.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street and cross-street the same way you entered the town/city.

After you enter the street, you can also enter the cross street or the house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names.

2. Highlight street.

3. Select the street.

Alternative: entering street and house number 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street the same way you entered the town/city.

3. "House number"

4. Select the digits.

5. Change to the list of house numbers.

6. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

No such street at the destination The desired street is not in the entered town/ city because it belongs to another district of the town/city.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "Street" or displayed street.

4. Change to the list of street names.

5. Select "In" displayed country.

All streets of the entered country are offered. The corresponding town/city is dis- played after the street name.

6. Select the letters.

7. Change to the list of street names.

8. Highlight street.

9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation", refer to page 132.

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

127

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> Setting "Route preference", refer to page 134.

> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 128.

Address book To create contacts, refer to page 198.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations.

If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone* are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page. 189.

3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired, using the "A-Z search".

4. Select "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing a destination in the address book Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

3. Select an existing contact, if available.

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

5. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.

6. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position Your current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact".

4. Depending on the selection, select an exist- ing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. Highlight the entry.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

128

Using the home address as a destination The home address must be created. Specifying a home address, refer to page 198.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Opening the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation"

Editing a destination Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina- tions".

Special destinations You can search for a special destination, e.g. a hotel or place of interest, and start destination guidance to the corresponding location.

The scope of information provided depends on the particular set of naviga-

tion data you are using.<

Opening the search for special destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of Interest"

The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.

Searching online* 1. "Google Search"

2. Select the special destination.

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Start guidance"

Special destination location As you input the search destination, you can select from among various options.

> "At current location"

> "At destination"

> "At different location"

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

129

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> "Along route"

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search"

2. "Town/City"

3. Select or enter town/city.

4. "Category"

5. Select category.

6. "Category details" For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details.

7. "Keyword"

8. Enter keyword.

A list of the special destinations is dis- played.

9. Select the special destination.

Details are displayed.

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

10. Select the symbol.

11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation". Adding destination as another des- tination, refer to page 132.

"Start search": without entering a search term, the search is repeated with the last stored search term.

Category search 1. "Category search"

2. "Town/City"

3. Select or enter town/city.

4. "Category"

5. Select category.

6. "Category details" For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details.

7. "Start search"

A list of the special destinations is dis- played.

8. Select the special destination.

Details are displayed.

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

9. Select the symbol.

10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation". Adding destination as another des- tination, refer to page 132.

Displaying special destinations List of special destinations: the special destina- tions are displayed in order of their distance and are displayed with a direction arrow pointing toward the destination.

With the Professional navigation system: In the split screen, special destinations from the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

Destination entry via BMW Assist* A connection to the BMW Concierge service is established, refer to page 199.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Open "Options".

4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

130

4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the settings.

Destination entry via map If you only know the location of a destination or street, then you can enter the destination with the aid of the map.

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is displayed on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> To change the scale: turn the controller.

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

5. Press the controller to display additional menu items.

> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination".

> "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Specifying the street If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis- plays one of the following pieces of information:

> A street name in the vicinity.

> The district.

> The coordinates of the destination.

Interactive map In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

> Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination".

> "Exit interactive map": Go back to the map view.

> "View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction".

> "Display destination": the section of the map around the destination is displayed.

> "Display current location": The section of the map around the cur- rent position is displayed.

> "Find points of interest", refer to page 128.

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

131

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination entry via voice*

General information For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 23.

> During the destination entry by voice, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary.

> Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

Saying the entries > With the Professional navigation system:

City/town, street, and house number can be entered with a single command*.

> Countries, towns and cities, streets and intersections can be spoken as whole words* in the system language, refer to page 81, or can be spelled.

Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.

> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the area is different from the system language.

> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag- gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

> The methods of entry depend on the navi- gation data in use and on the country and language settings.

Entering an address in a command* 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for a request from the system.

4. Say the address aloud in the suggested order.

5. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g. the town/city.

Entering a town/city The town/city name can be spoken as a com- plete word* or spelled.

With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city.

4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least the first three letters.

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit- ies may be suggested.

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled in a separate list and are displayed as one town/ city followed by three dots.

1. Select an entry:

2. Select the desired town/city.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city is selected and press the controller.

Entering a street or intersection The street or intersection is entered in the same manner as the town/city.

2. {Enter address}

2. {City} or {Spell city}.

5. Select a location:

> To select a recommended town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {New entry}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry }

> To spell an entry: {Spell city}

{Yes} or {Entry } e.g. entry 2.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

132

Entering a house number Depending on the data in the navigation sys- tem, house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be entered:

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations

New trip A trip can be planned using intermediate desti- nations.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.

4. "Guidance"

5. "Enter new destination"

6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination.

8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination"

2. Select the type of destination entry.

3. Enter the intermediate destination.

4. "Add as another destination" The intermediate destination is inserted into the destination list and highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is at the desired place in the list.

6. Press the controller.

Starting the trip After entering all intermediate destinations, highlight the first destination and say "Start guidance"

For example if the second destination is high- lighted at the start of route guidance, then the first destination is skipped over.

The symbol indicates the active intermedi- ate destination.

Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you to store new trips.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Store trip"

3. Enter a name.

4. "OK"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.

Selecting a stored trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. "Start guidance"

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number. Say each digit separately.

3. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

{Start guidance}

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

133

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Changin a trip

Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in reverse order in the list.

1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Options for intermediate destinations 1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all trip destinations"

4. Select an intermediate destination.

> "Edit destination"

> "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the intermediate destination within the list.

> "Delete dest. in the trip"

> "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not possible for some trips.

Deleting a stored trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Selecting last trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. "Last trip"

4. "Start guidance"

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

134

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. Entering a destination, refer to page 125.

3. "Accept destination"

4. "Start guidance"

The route is displayed on the Control Display after it is calculated.

In the map view, the distance to the destination/ intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed.

The arrow display appears on the Control Dis- play, if so desired.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Guidance"

4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information > You can influence the calculated route by

selecting certain trip criteria.

> Route criteria can be changed during desti- nation entry and during route guidance.

> Street types are part of the navigation data and are taken into account in route plan- ning, e.g. avoiding highways.

> The proposed route can differ from per- sonal experience.

> The settings are stored for the remote con- trol currently in use.

> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 140.

Changing route criteria 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Route preference"

4. Selecting a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimized route through a combination of the least pos- sible distance and stretches of road that allow rapid driving.

> "Efficient route": optimized combi- nation of the fastest and shortest possi- ble route.

> "Short route": short distance without taking time into account.

> "Alternative routes": are suggested, where possible, during active route guidance. The individual suggestions are labeled in color.

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

135

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

> "Avoid highways": highways are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible.

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

Route

General information Depending on your vehicle's equipment, vari- ous views of the route are available during route guidance:

> Arrow display on the Control Display.

> List of route segments.

> Map view, refer to page 136.

Arrow display The following information is displayed during route guidance:

> Large arrow: current direction of travel.

> Small arrow: indicates the next change of direction.

> Intersection view.

> Lane information.

> Traffic bulletins.

> Distance to the next change of direction.

> Street name of the next change of direction.

Lane information In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of multi-lane roads are each marked with a trian- gle.

> Filled triangle: optimum lane.

> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can, however, also be possible to briefly make additional lane changes.

Displaying the list of route segments If the route guidance has been started, then you can display a list of route segments. The dis- tance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are dis- played for each segment of the route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. Highlight the route segment.

The route segment is displayed in the preview map.

Bypassing a section of the route During route guidance, prompt the navigation system to bypass certain route segments. In doing so, you will specify how many kilometers to travel before returning to the original route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for"

4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mile- age.

5. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be bypassed:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for"

4. "Remove blocking"

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

136

Gas station recommendations The remaining range is calculated and filling stations along the route are displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "Recommended refuel" A list of filling stations is displayed.

4. Select a gas station.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the selected filling station is started.

"Add as another destination": the filling sta- tion is incorporated into the route.

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Voice instructions"

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 21.

Repeating a voice instruction 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Highlight the symbol.

4. Press the controller twice.

Adjusting volume for voice instructions The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Map view

Displaying the map view 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

Overview

1 Toolbar

2 Route segment with traffic obstruction

3 Road sign for traffic obstruction

4 Planned route

5 Current location

6 Upper status box

7 Lower status box

Lines on the map Streets and roads are depicted with different colors and lines according to their classification. Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry con- nections. National borders are depicted with thin lines.

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

137

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route identify route segments with traffic obstructions, depending on map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc- tion.

Road signs classify the obstructions.

> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the planned route or direction of travel.

> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not relate to the planned route or direction of travel.

Traffic bulletins, refer to page 138.

Planned route After route guidance is started, the planned route is displayed on the map.

Status boxes Show/hide: press the controller.

> Upper status box: time, phone details, and entertainment details.

> Lower status box: symbol for active route guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time, and distance from destination.

Toolbar The following functions are available directly in the map view:

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the con- troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing scale 1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Automatic scaling of the map In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale. The map shows the entire range from your loca- tion to the destination.

Settings for the map view The map is shown on the Control Display.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Settings"

Set the optimized map view.

> "Day/night mode" Select and adjust depending on light condi- tions.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: Settings are not taken into account.

> "Satellite images" Depending on the availability and resolu- tion, satellite images* are displayed in scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

> "Perspective view in 3D" Displays a three-dimensional view. Promi- nent areas that are contained in the naviga- tion data are displayed on the map in 3D.

> "Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destina- tions are no longer displayed.

Symbol Function

Starting/stopping destination guidance

Switching voice instructions on/ off

Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives

Special destinations

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Map view settings

Changing scale

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

138

Map view for the split screen display The map view for the split screen can be selected separately from the main screen.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.

4. Select "Split screen content" or scale.

5. Select the map view:

> "Arrow display"

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Map view with perspective"

> "Position"

> "Exit ramp view"

> "Traffic conditions/gray map"

6. To change the scale: switch to the split screen and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins*

Overview > You can display the traffic bulletins from

radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic infor- mation service. Bulletins about traffic obstructions and hazards are continuously updated.

> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on the map.

> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the toolbar of the map view turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the calcu- lated route.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions Certain BMW models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability

the following additional terms and conditions apply:

An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- User is in material breach of the terms and con- ditions contained herein.

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net- work") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho- rized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa- tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed.

C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit- ted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limita- tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular pur- pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

139

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

damages (including, without limitation, lost rev- enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse- quential damages, so those particular limita- tions may not apply to you.

Activating/deactivating reception 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Accessing traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Traffic Info"

First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed.

The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.

4. Select a traffic bulletin.

"More information": Display additional information.

5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if desired.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Con- trol Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. Symbols or special destinations are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Settings"

5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the location of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are displayed.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc- tion's length, direction and impact are displayed on the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route.

> Red: traffic congestion

> Orange: stop-and-go traffic

> Yellow: heavy traffic

> Green: clear roads

> Gray: general traffic information, e.g. con- struction zone

The bulletins displayed depend in the respec- tive traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the map.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories"

5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins from the selected categories are displayed on the map.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

140

> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are always shown.

> For your personal safety, it is not possible to hide traffic bulletins that announce a poten- tial hazard.

Route guidance with traffic bulletins

Semi-dynamic route guidance With traffic bulletin reception switched on, semi-dynamic route guidance is active.

The system takes into account the existing traf- fic bulletins during route guidance. A message is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. The message displays the traffic bulletin and in the event of a traffic obstruction, suggests an alter- nate route. The difference in distance and time between the original route and the alternate route are also displayed.

Taking an alternate route:

"Detour"

With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the roadway, a message is displayed without a pos- sible alternate route.

It is also possible to take alternate routes can also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed via the list:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Traffic Info"

4. "Detour information"

5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions.

> The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route.

> Traffic bulletins will continue to be dis- played on the map.

> Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction,

the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of the setting.

To activate dynamic route guidance:

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Dynamic guidance"

N av

ig at

io n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

141

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

What to do if

What to do if

> The current position cannot be displayed? The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Reception is generally available when you are in the open.

> The destination guidance does not accept a destination without a street name? A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.

> The destination guidance does not accept a destination? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

> The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The map view is displayed in grayscale? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Control Display changes to a grayscale dis- play. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

> Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance? The area has not been fully recorded yet, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu- late a new route suggestion.

Entertainment Operation of the radio, CD equipment and

external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter.

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

144

On/off and tone

The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments:

> Radio

> CD/DVD player

> CD changer* > Video* > External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls The audio and video sources can be controlled using the:

> Buttons near the CD/DVD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10

> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21

> Voice activation system

Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol- ume

> Press: switch on/off When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.

> Turn: adjusting the volume

2 Eject the CD/DVD

3 CD/DVD drive*

4 FM/AM: change the radio station wave- band

5 MODE: change the audio and video sources

6 Station scan/track search

> Change the radio station

> Select the track for the CD/DVD player, CD changer and certain multimedia devices

Switching on/off To switch the entertainment audio output on or off: Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.

The sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition was switched off. For sound output, switch the unit back on.

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

145

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Treble, bass, balance, fader > "Treble": height adjustment.

> "Bass": depth adjustment.

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone setting.

4. To adjust: turn the controller.

5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Equalizer"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Multi-channel playback, surround* You can choose between stereo and multi- channel playback, surround.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Surround"

When surround is activated, multi-channel playback is simulated when playing an audio track in stereo.

Volume > "Speed volume": volume is adapted

depending on the speed

> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC acoustic signal relative to the entertainment sound output

> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g. for the acoustic seat belt warning relative to the entertainment sound output

> "Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone conversation.

> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker dur- ing a phone conversation

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

146

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

147

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Radio

Your radio is designed for reception of the fol- lowing stations:

> FM and AM

> HD Radio* > Satellite radio*

Selecting a station

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations Turn the controller and press it

or

press the button for the corresponding direction

or

press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Selecting a station manually Station selection using the frequency.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual"

4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Storing stations

Via iDrive 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

R ad

io

148

4. Press the controller for an extended period.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via programmable memory keys You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.

1. Select a station.

2. Press and hold the desired button ... .

Radio Data System RDS* In the FM waveband, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names appear in the display.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

HD Radio reception* Many stations broadcast both analog and digi- tal signals. If a digital radio network is available, these stations can be received digitally and thus with better sound quality.

License conditions

HD Radio technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For- eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq- uity Digital Corp.

Switching digital radio reception on/off 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "HD Radio Reception"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, playback switches between analog and digital reception. Any time shift between these two broadcasts can lead to repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation The symbol indicates that a main station includes additional substations. The station name of the main station ends with HD1. The

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

149

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

station names of the subchannels end with HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select the substation.

In the event of poor reception, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is inter- rupted for a longer period of time, then the sys- tem switches back to the main station.

Presets It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the stations on the program- mable memory keys, refer to page 21.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

150

Satellite radio

General information The channels are offered in predefined pack- ages. The packages must be enabled by tele- phone.

Navigation bar overview

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 21.

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling the channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate- gory.

5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the chan- nel enabled.

You can also unsubscribe from the channels via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

*

Symbol Function

Changing the list view

Selecting a category

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Opening the favorites, opening the My Favorites category

Managing the favorites

Traffic Jump

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

151

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

4. "Manage subscription"

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

5. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan- nels.

Selecting a channel You can only listen to enabled channels.

The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via iDrive 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Select the desired channel.

Via the button in the area of the CD/ DVD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Set channel"

4. Turn the controller until the desired channel is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.

4. Select the desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.

6. Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the channels on the pro- grammable memory keys, refer to page 21.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym- bol on the navigation bar is pressed.

Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Function

Channel name

Artist

Track

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

152

Selecting a category 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad- cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Replay - Time shift"

> The red arrow shows the current playback position.

> The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar.

> With a live broadcast: "live".

Timeshift menu

Automatic Timeshift With the function activated, the audio playback is automatically stopped when:

> There are incoming and outgoing phone calls.

> The voice activation system is activated.

> Muting function is activated.

The audio playback continues after a time delay.

Activating 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Replay - Time shift"

4. "Automatic time shift"

Deactivating "Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league and team.

Storing the artist, track or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur- rently being broadcast. The channel informa- tion must be available.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Select the desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic Timeshift deactivated/ activated

Symbol Function

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

153

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

6. Select the artist, track or game.

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Manage favorites"

4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the desired league.

6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is being played, the mes- sage "Favorite alert!" appears for approx. 20 seconds.

Select "Favorites" while the alert message is being displayed.

The displayed favorite is played.

If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites cur- rently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated glo- bally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Highlight the desired favorite.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Set jump"

5. Select the desired region.

The region is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Jump to:"

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

A new panel opens.

Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

154

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes > Reception may not be available in some sit-

uations, such as under certain environmen- tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio cannot influence this.

> The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broadcast.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

155

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

CD/DVD player and CD changer

CD/DVD playback

Inserting a CD/DVD Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

Playable formats CD/DVD player

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD*, SVCD*

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*, M4A*

CD changer* > CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Starting playback

Via iDrive Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to page 159.

To start playback when a CD/DVD is already in the player or changer:

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

Ejecting a CD/DVD Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

Audio playback

Selecting a track using the button Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

*

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

CD changer

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

156

4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files* Depending on the data, some letters and num- bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor- rectly.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

5. Select a track and press the controller.

Displaying information about the track* If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD

> Track file name

Random sequence playback, Random The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played once in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all tracks of the selected directory are played back in random order.

Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

157

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Automatic repeat* Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

Video playback*

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Starting playback For your own safety, the video image is only dis- played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto- matic transmission is in the park position.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content.

4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

4. "Select track"

5. Select the desired track.

The CD/DVD is started.

Video menu To open the Video menu:

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis- played.

The Video menu is displayed:

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South Amer- ica, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu*

Starting playback

Pause

Stop

Next chapter/next track

Previous chapter/previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

158

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

Video menu.

2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: move and press the controller.

> To change to the Video menu: turn the con- troller and select "Back".

DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Language* 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles* Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Subtitles"

4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis- play subtitles".

Brightness, contrast, color 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display settings"

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed, and then press the controller.

Zoom Display the video image on the full screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Zoom mode"

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

159

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Selecting track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Select title"

5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

Camera angle* The camera angle depends on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Viewing angle"

5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

CD changer* The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo area.

Removing the CD magazine To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.

2. Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine will be ejected.

Push the magazine back in after at least 2 seconds have passed so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Inserting CDs: Insert one CD per compartment with the labeled side up.

Removing CDs: Pull out the desired compartment and take out the CD.

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

160

Inserting the CD magazine

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc- tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; other- wise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus; otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this may be due to one of the following reasons.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsis- tent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damage Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat- ents and the intellectual property of the Macro- vision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro- tection may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround Manufactured under license of US patent numbers: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other patents granted and pending in both the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg- istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

161

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Music collection

Storing music The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com- pressed audio format when they are stored. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/ DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi- cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A*, and AAC* formats. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.

Regularly back up the music data; other- wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on

the hard disc.<

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry stan- dard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may prac- tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132, 6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and 6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending patents. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: 6.304.523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade- marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Storing files from CDs/DVDs CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD player.

1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "CD/DVD"

4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed. The tracks are stored and played back in sequence from the music collection.

Observe the following during the storage pro- cess: Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player; otherwise, the storage process will be interrupted. You can switch to the other audio sources with- out interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD can also be called up, if they have been stored already.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

M u

si c

co lle

ct io

n

162

3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing"

The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

4. "Continue storing"

The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the beginning of the track at which storing was interrupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor- mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con- nected to the USB interface in the glove com- partment.

> Suitable devices: USB mass storage devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.

> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with multi- ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

Music from a USB device can be stored only via the USB interface in the glove

compartment.<

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "Music collection"

4. Open "Options".

5. "Music data import/export"

6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

163

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

4. Select the desired category.

5. To select the desired entry:

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input.

or

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select additional categories if desired. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

The list of tracks is automatically repeated.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search by voice* For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 23.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

To select a track directly:

Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Top 50"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

2. {Music search}

3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select artist}.

4. Say the desired entry in the list.

5. Select additional categories if desired.

{Title }

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

M u

si c

co lle

ct io

n

164

3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

4. To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random sequence playback, Random All tracks of the selection are played back in random order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat- ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later.

An album cannot be renamed while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played.

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the directory or track.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

165

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB medium. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur- ing a long trip.

1. Start the engine.

2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment, refer to page 107.

3. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Music collection"

5. Open "Options".

6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Restoring the music collection in the vehicle

When storing from the USB device, the music collection existing in the vehicle is

replaced.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Music data import/export"

5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete music collection"

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

166

External devices

Overview

AUX-IN port

Overview > It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.

MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi- cle speakers.

> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and volume settings on the audio device. Tone may depend on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting Lift up the center armrest.

Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.

The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest.

Connect the headphone connection or line-out connection of the device to the jack plug.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and

using the audio device, select a track.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "External devices" if applicable

4. "AUX front"

Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Volume The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting volume 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices" if applicable

3. "AUX front"

4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and then press the controller.

USB audio interface*/audio interface for mobile phone*

Overview It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out- put over the vehicle speakers.

Options for connecting external devices > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface*

Mobile phone audio interface*

Bluetooth audio*

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

167

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

> Connection via the snap-in adapter*, when equipped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may only be possible when no device is con- nected to the AUX-IN port.

Because of the large number of audio devices available on the market, an operation via the vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio device/mobile phone. Ask a BMW center for suitable audio devices/ mobile phones.

Audio files Playback of standard audio files is possible:

> MP3

> WMA

> WAV (PCM)

> AAC*, M4A* > Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS

Connecting via the USB audio interface Lift up the center armrest.

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.

2 USB interface

Apple iPod/iPhone Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface 2.

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup- ported by the USB audio interface.

USB device To protect the USB interface and USB device from mechanical damage, connect them with a flexible adapter cable.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.

After initial connection Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music style and the playlists are imported into the vehicle. It can take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks The data from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi- cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist- ing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

Playback begins with the first track.

After a few seconds, the divided screen mask, split screen*, will display the CD cover associ- ated with the track, if so desired.

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

168

Track search Selection is possible via:

> Playback lists.

> Information: music style, artist, album, track.

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory, composer.

Track titles are displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Search"

5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Art- ist".

All entries are displayed in a list.

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input. When a character is entered, a filter is applied using this character as the first letter. When several characters are entered, all results are displayed that contain this sequence of characters.

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select additional categories if desired.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if you wish to display all of the tracks of a particular artist, then only select this artist. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists To open playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence The current list of tracks is played in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback*

Overview Video playback possible via snap-in adapter. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out- put over the vehicle speakers.

Playback For your own safety, the video image is only dis- played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto- matic transmission is in the park position.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

169

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Video"

5. Select the directory, if necessary.

To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

6. Select the desired video file to begin play- back.

Video menu

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high tem- peratures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.

Notes on connecting > The connected audio device is supplied

with a maximum current of 500 mA, if the device supports this. For this reason, do not connect the device to a charging socket in the vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possi- ble to ensure correct playback.

> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard drives.

> Do not use the USB audio interface to charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio*

Overview > It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music

files from external devices, e.g. audio devices or mobile phones.

Using a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 166.

> Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

> The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, change the vol- ume setting on the device.

> Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements > Suitable device. For information, go to

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

> Device operational.

> Ignition switched on.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 178, and in the device.

> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 177.

> Bluetooth presets in the device are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to owner's manual for the device.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Blue- tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- ing.

Pairing and connecting Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead

to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. "Add new phone"

Symbol Format

Next video file

Previous video file

It may be necessary to click the symbol twice in order to play the previous video file.

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

170

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

5. To perform other operations on the device, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device's display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device's display.

You will be prompted by iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

8. Select desired functions with which the device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".

9. "OK"

If the pairing was successful, the device is dis- played as connected.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

If the pairing was not successful: What to do if, refer to page 171.

Connecting a particular device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source.

Connection is not possible if a data exchange is currently taking place via a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.

Prerequisite If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devices.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Configure phone"

7. Activate "Audio".

8. "OK"

Connecting a device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information > The display of track information depends on

the device.

> Operation via the device or iDrive are both possible.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

171

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is taking place with a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect device.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "External devices"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired title from the list.

Playback menu* Depending on the device, all functions may not be available.

Disconnecting an audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. Select the desired device from the list of connected devices.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. "Audio"

7. "OK"

With a mobile phone, only the audio connection is disconnected. All other connections remain active.

Unpairing device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if Information about suitable devices is available at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 176.

> Device not supported by vehicle.

If necessary, perform a software update*, refer to page 172.

> Device could not be paired or connected.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary, delete the connections with other devices.

Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

Symbol Function

Next track

Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous track

Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

172

Is the device no longer responding? Switch the device off and back on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure.

> No music can be played.

Start the program for playing music files on the device and if necessary, select a track via the device.

Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

> Music files only play quietly.

Adjust volume settings on the device.

> Playback is interrupted by the press of a button or other messages on the device.

Switch off key tones and other acoustic sig- nal on the device.

> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic report and does not automatically continue.

Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

> Playback is not possible when the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the same time via the extended connec- tivity of the music player in the mobile phone*.

Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g. the audio connection, refer to page 171, and start playback again.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

Software update* The vehicle supports various external devices, depending on the software it is currently using. A software update can enable the vehicle to support new mobile phones or new external devices, for example.

Software updates and associated, up-to-date instructions are available on the web page www.bmwusa.com/update.

Displaying current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Show current version"

Select the desired version* to display additional information*.

Updating software by USB* The software update can only be performed when stopped.

1. Save the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB data storage device.

2. Connect the USB data storage device to the USB interface of the USB audio interface in the center armrest. It is not possible to per- form the update using the USB interface in the glove compartment.

3. "Settings"

4. "Software update"

5. "Update software"

6. "USB" if applicable

7. "Start update"

8. "OK"

All of the listed software updates are installed.

Restoring to previous version If necessary, it is possible to restore the system to the software version prior to the last software update.

Restoring to the previous version can only be performed when stopped.

N av

ig at

io n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

173

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Restore previous version"

4. Click "OK" twice.

All of the listed software updates are removed.

Note BMW Assist*, Office functions, and connected devices may be temporarily unavailable during a software update or while restoring to the previ- ous version. Wait a few minutes until the func- tions are available once more.

Communications This chapter describes how to use

the telephone, BMW Assist and BMW TeleServices.

T el

ep h

o n

e

176

Telephone

At a glance

The concept Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g. audio players, can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.

After being paired once, when the ignition is switched on, these devices are automatically detected as soon as they are present in the vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, the but- tons on the steering wheel, and by voice*.

Depending on whether they are functioning as a telephone and/or as an audio source, external devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele- phone functions will be described below. Oper- ation of audio functions, refer to page 169.

Up to four external devices can be paired.

It may be necessary for some functions to be activated by the mobile phone provider or ser- vice provider.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in

your hand while you are driving; use the hands- free system instead. Otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Snap-in adapter* The snap-in adapter makes it possible:

> Accommodate the mobile phone.

> Recharge its battery.

> Connect it to an external antenna of the vehicle.

This assures a better network connection and constant sound quality.

Suitable mobile phones For precise information about which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth

interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/blue- tooth.

Displaying vehicle identification number and software part number Checking which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation requires the vehicle identification number and software part number. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth info"

4. "Display system information"

With a certain software version, these suitable mobile phones support the vehicle functions described below.

With other mobile phones or software versions, malfunctions may occur.

A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle should not be operated via the mobile phone keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

It is possible to perform a software update, refer to page 172.

Pairing/unpairing mobile phone

General information The following functions are available:

> Using the mobile phone as a telephone.

> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary phone*.

> Using the mobile phone as an audio source.

> Using an audio device as an audio source, refer to page 169.

*

177

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Requirements > Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 176.

> Mobile phone operational.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 178, and in the mobile phone.

> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to owner's manual for the mobile phone.

> Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 177.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Blue- tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- ing.

> Ignition switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Auxiliary phone* A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary phone.

Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be accepted, refer to page 180. missed calls to the auxiliary phone can be shown in the Control Display.

Office Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and emails* are imported from the mobile phone into the vehicle.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Activating/deactivating additional functions To use these functions in the vehicle, activate them before pairing. For information on suitable mobile phones that support these functions, refer to page 176.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Open "Options".

4. Select the desired additional function:

> "Additional telephone"

> "Office"

> "Bluetooth audio"

If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot be assigned to a phone.

Pairing and connecting a device Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead

to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

T el

ep h

o n

e

178

4. To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Blue- tooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass- key.

6. Enter the passkey and confirm.

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of devices.

Functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols during the pairing.

White symbol: function active.

Gray symbol: function inactive.

Four devices can be paired with the vehicle simultaneously. Three devices can be con- nected to the vehicle simultaneously.

If the pairing was not successful: What to do if, refer to page 179.

Following the initial pairing > The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> The phone book entries of the telephone that are stored on the SIM card* or the mobile phone are imported into the vehicle once the device is detected, depending on the mobile phone.

> Four devices can be paired.

> Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular device If more than one device is detected by the vehi- cle, the device at the top of the list is connected. A different device can be connected by select- ing it.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Select the device to be connected.

The functions assigned before the unpairing of the device are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If a device is already connected, then these functions are deactivated if neces- sary.

Configuring devices Additional functions can be activated or deacti- vated in paired and connected devices.

Symbol Function

Telephone

Auxiliary phone*

Audio source

179

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Highlight the device to be configured.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. Select the desired functions. At least one function must be selected.

> "Telephone"

> "Additional telephone"

> "Audio"

7. "OK"

If a device is assigned a function, this may deac- tivate the function in an already connected device and cause the other device to be unpaired.

Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary phone* If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con- nected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped between the two devices.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing device 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 176.

The mobile phone could not be paired or con- nected.

> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and in the mobile phone.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

> Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con- nections with other devices on the mobile phone.

> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti- vate the audio connection.

> Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter* or via a charging cable.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

> Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

Telephone functions not possible.

T el

ep h

o n

e

180

> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary phone and is the auxiliary phone function deactivated? Activate the function.

> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of them are displayed, or they are displayed incompletely.

> The transfer of phone book entries has not yet completed.

> It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card* are transferred.

> Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed.

> The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

> The data volume of the phone book entry is too great, e.g. due to additionally stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume.

> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or auxiliary phone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The telephone connection quality is low.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal.

> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter* or place it in the vicinity of the cen- ter console.

> Adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker separately.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function, please check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth for further notes or contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

Operation

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the mobile phone and the volume of the person on the phone with you. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec- essary to adjust the volumes.

Adjustments are only possible during a call and must be carried out separately for each phone. When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the settings.

1. "Settings"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. To select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, then the name and number of the contact are dis- played; otherwise, only the number is dis- played.

If a contact is assigned more than one phone number, then only the name of the caller is dis- played.

181

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

With calls to the auxiliary phone*, only the num- ber is displayed if it is transmitted by the net- work.

An incoming call to the auxiliary phone is auto- matically rejected if a call with the phone is cur- rently active.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

"Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "End call"

Entering phone numbers

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select the symbol.

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information It is possible to switch between two calls or to connect two calls to establish a conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and by the service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function may have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone may need to be adjusted for this.

When a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call-waiting signal sounds.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

T el

ep h

o n

e

182

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return"

The call on hold is continued.

Switching between two calls, toggling Active call: highlighted.

The call on hold is identified with: "on hold...".

"Swap calls"

The phone switches to the call on hold.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Muting the microphone The microphone can be muted in active calls.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Microphone mute"

The muted microphone is automatically acti- vated:

> If a new call is made.

> When switching between callers on hold.

Keypad dialing Use keypad dialing to gain access to network services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely access an answering machine. This requires the DTMF code.

1. "Telephone"

2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"

3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter a DTMF code.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts of the telephone and shows all contacts for which a phone number is entered. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

183

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 188.

Calling a contact

Contacts with a stored phone number: select the desired contact. The connection is estab- lished.

Contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the desired contact and then select the phone number. The connection is established.

Editing a contact Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the

mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed.

The last 20 phone numbers dialed are dis- played. The sorting of the phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

Dialing the number via iDrive 1. "Telephone"

2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and phone number, if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. Select "Store contact" if necessary

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls in the mobile phone is transferred into the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that were received in the vehicle are displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Contact with a stored phone number.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible. The mobile phone has no reception or network or a Ser- vice Request is currently active.

T el

ep h

o n

e

184

The last 20 calls received are displayed. The sorting and displaying of phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Select an entry.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. Select "Store contact" if necessary

Hands-free system

General information Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can be continued using the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that have been initiated from outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued using the hands-free system if the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the call is automatically switched to hands-free mode.

If the switch does not occur automatically, then follow the instructions that appear on the dis- play of the mobile phone, also refer to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

From hands-free system to mobile phone Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can also be continued using the mobile phone if so desired, depending on the mobile phone.

At this point, follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Operation by voice commands* With voice activation system: Operation, refer to page 23.

Without voice activation system: Depending on your equipment, the mobile phone can be operated by voice as described below.

The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual applies only to this type of voice activa- tion.

The concept > The mobile phone can be operated without

removing your hand from the steering wheel.

> In many cases, the entry process is sup- ported by means of announcements or questions.

> {...}indicates commands for voice activa- tion.

185

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say the command.

Finishing voice input Press the button on the steering wheel briefly or

Possible commands

Having the possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word.

Possible commands are read aloud.

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

Each digit can be spoken individually or com- bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry process.

Using alternative commands Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Example: dialing phone numbers To start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone numbers Digit sequences can be deleted after the sys- tem has repeated the digits.

The command can be repeated as often as nec- essary.

Deleting phone number

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Redialing

Voice phone book* Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book.

The entries must be entered using voice com- mands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

You say Voice command response

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}.

{Lschen}.

{Redial}.

T el

ep h

o n

e

186

Storing the entry

Deleting the entry

Deleting all entries

Listening to and selecting entries

Selecting an entry

Adjusting volume Turn knob during announcement.

> The volume remains the same, even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

> The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini- tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa- tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 234, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.

Ambient conditions > Say the commands, numbers and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always say commands in the language of the system. The language of the voice acti- vation of the mobile phone is preset and cannot be changed via the Control Display.

> Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof*, and convertible top* closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Snap-in adapter*

Installation location In the center armrest.

Inserting snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a speaking duration of about 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system.

4. {Save}.

1. {Delete name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialog for deleting the phone book opens.

2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.

1. {Read phonebook}. The dialog for reading the phone book opens.

2. Say {Dial number} when the desired entry is read.

1. {Dial name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

187

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until it clicks into place.

Inserting mobile phone

1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to remove the protective cap of the antenna connector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical con- tact points and press it downward until it engages.

Removing mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

O ff

ic e

188

Office

At a glance

General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and emails* can be displayed using the Control Display if the mobile phone compat- ibly supports these functions and the required Bluetooth radio standards.

For information about which mobile phones and functions support the functions of Office, go to www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

A limited number of compatible mobile phones are available for Office.

Contents are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped.

Only read access to the mobile phone is possi- ble.

Do not use Office while driving. Make entries only when traffic and road condi-

tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Requirements > A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, the data access to the mobile phone must be confirmed.

> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 76, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone in order, for example, to correctly display appointments.

> Office is activated, refer to page 177.

Updating Data are updated each time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointments, tasks, notes, and reminders can be updated sepa- rately.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks", "Notes" or "Reminders"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Update data"

Data from the portable phone are transmit- ted to the vehicle again.

Current office The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office"

3. Selecting the desired entry to display details.

Contacts

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The con- tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well, if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destina- tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

*

189

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Displaying contacts 1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Dialing a phone number* 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. "Store contact in vehicle"

If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is dis- played.

Selecting a contact as a destination* 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

With contacts from the mobile phone, the address must be compared with the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:

Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation"

Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

If the address is corrected and stored, then a copy is established in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and one Internet address.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destina- tion.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

O ff

ic e

190

4. "New contact"

5. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter text and assign a contact type.

8. When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.

9. "Accept address" if necessary

10. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned various contact types.

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting name sorting* Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts were stored in your mobile phone, the sorting of names can differ from the sorting selected.

Displaying contact pictures* Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Show images"

The display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Highlight the contact.

4. "Options"

5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Messages

General information The displaying of text messages and emails* from the mobile phone depends on whether the mobile phone supports transmission into the vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages and emails* may not be supported by the ser- vice provider or the function may have to be

Symbol Meaning

Private phone number

Business phone number

Mobile phone number

Other phone number

Private address

Business address

191

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

separately activated. After a mobile phone is paired for the first time, the transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only dis- played completely when the vehicle is stopped. Messages from the auxiliary phone* are not transferred.

To display various messages:

> Text messages.

> Messages from My info*.

> Messages from the BMW Concierge ser- vice*.

> Emails* from the mobile phone.

Displaying messages 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

Message type A symbol indicates the type of message.

Read message.

Unread message.

Filtering message list* The message list can be filtered if it contains more than one message type.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the message type.

> "All" All messages are displayed.

> "E-mail" Only emails from the mobile phone are displayed.

> "Services messages" Only messages from the BMW Con- cierge service and My Info are displayed.

> "Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service, My info, and BMW Online* can be deleted.

To delete a message:

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

4. Open "Options".

5. Open "Delete message".

To delete all messages:

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete all messages"

Text message

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page 194.

Having text messages read aloud* Having text messages read aloud, refer to page 194.

Symbol Message type

Text message

My Info

Message from the Concierge service, refer to page 199

Email* from the mobile phone

O ff

ic e

192

My Info

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation"

Dialing a number in a message Up to 4 phone numbers can be sent with a mes- sage.

1. Select the desired message.

2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, a tele- phone connection is established.

"Select phone number":

If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

Saving an address 1. Select the desired message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Messages from the Concierge service*

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another des- tination"

3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

Dialing a number in a message Up to 4 phone numbers can be sent with a mes- sage.

1. Select the desired message.

2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, a tele- phone connection is established.

"Select phone number"

If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

Saving an address 1. Select the desired message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Displaying additional information 1. Select the desired message.

2. "Further information"

Email*

Displaying email 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

Displaying email contacts If the sender and recipient of an email are trans- ferred from the mobile phone, they are dis- played in the email.

"Sender/Recipient"

If the email address is stored in the contacts, the contact is displayed. Select contact to dis- play details.

If the email address is not stored in the con- tacts, then the display might show only the email address.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page 194.

Having an email read aloud* Having an email read aloud, refer to page 194.

193

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Calendar

Displaying calendar Appointments from the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Calendar"

Appointments of the current day are dis- played.

Selecting calendar day 1. Select date.

2. Select desired day or date.

> "Next day"

> "Date:"

> "Previous day"

> "Today"

Displaying appointment 1. Select the desired appointment.

2. To scroll through appointment, if neces- sary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page 194.

Reading an appointment aloud Reading an appointment aloud, refer to page 194.

Tasks

Displaying task list Display open tasks that must be completed within the next 90 days.

1. "Office"

2. "Tasks"

Sorting task list 1. Select the top line in the task list.

2. To select a sorting criterion:

> "Priority (!)"

> "Subject"

> "Due date"

Displaying task 1. Select the desired task.

2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page 194.

Reading a task aloud* Reading a task aloud, refer to page 194.

O ff

ic e

194

Notes

Displaying notes 1. "Office"

2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying a note 1. Select the desired note.

2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page 194.

Reading a note aloud Reading a note aloud, refer to page 194.

Reminders

Displaying reminders Reminders for imminent appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment has passed or a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Reminders"

3. Select the desired reminder.

The associated appointment or task is dis- played.

Using contact data

At a glance Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected*, refer to page.

Displaying a contact or selecting a phone number 1. "Use contact data"

2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:

> Select a contact to display a detailed view of the contact.

> Select a phone number to directly estab- lish a connection.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data"

2. Highlight a phone number or email address.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new contact"

Reading aloud* Text messages, emails*, appointments, tasks, and notes can be read aloud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol.

While the message is being read aloud, you have the following options:

> "Pause"

195

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Interrupt the reading. Select again to resume the reading.

> "Back to beginning"

Read message again from the beginning.

> Select the symbol.

Skip back one paragraph.

> Select the symbol.

Skip over a paragraph.

> To terminate the reading, move the control- ler toward the left.

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 176.

> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or emails* from the mobile phone are not dis- played?

The mobile phone is not suitable for the missing function or is not correctly con- nected.

The mobile phone has not been assigned the Office function.

The mobile phone is connected as an auxil- iary phone.

The appointments are older than 20 days and are more than 50 days in the future.

The tasks have been marked as completed or are more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of appointments, tasks, notes, and messages stored in the mobile phone, not all of them are displayed in the vehicle.

> Appointments or tasks from the mobile phone are not being displayed at the correct time?

The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set in the Control Display and in the mobile phone.

> Texts of entries are not displayed com- pletely?

Texts are already shortened by the mobile phone.

Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle can take a few minutes.

> Contact pictures are not being displayed?

Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle.

> If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired func- tion please contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

C o

n ta

ct s

196

Contacts

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The addresses can be used as destinations for nav- igation.

New contact 1. "Contacts"

2. "New contact"

3. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Entering text, refer to page 21.

When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.

6. "Store" if necessary

7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts

General information List of all contacts from the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

*

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destina- tion.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination*.

Mobile phone*

197

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. Move the controller to the left.

5. "Yes"

Selecting a contact as a destination* 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation"

Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

Selecting name sorting Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "My contacts"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported using Personal Profile, refer to page 28.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts"

2. Highlight the contact.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

C o

n n

ec te

d D

ri ve

198

ConnectedDrive

BMW Assist*

General information BMW Assist provides a number of different ser- vices. For example, the position data of the vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center when an Emergency Request* is sent.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the con- tract individually agreed upon.

After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new con- tract has been signed.

Requirements > The installed BMW Assist system is logged

into a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser- vices.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine its current position.

> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.

> The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. The service must have been fully enabled.

> BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered > Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Automatic Emergency Request: under cer- tain conditions, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.

> Customer Relations: connection to Cus- tomer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

> TeleServices: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit- ted to your BMW center, either automati- cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Response Center provides assistance if, for example, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.

> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to the police that your vehicle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter- mine its position.

> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information on route planning, the traffic situation and weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center, for example if the mobile phone is not available or discharged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

*

199

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

BMW TeleServices*

General information TeleServices supports communication with your BMW center.

> Data on the vehicle's service requirements can be sent directly to the BMW center. In this way, the BMW center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

> In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance*.

> The service varies by country.

> Connection may incur charges.

> Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements > BMW Assist is activated.

> Wireless reception is available.

> The engine is running.

Using BMW TeleServices* Generally, BMW TeleServices are activated in the vehicle.

If the services of BMW TeleServices are not activated, it is possible to establish a voice con- tact to the BMW Group Mobile Service.

For additional uses or to deactivate the ser- vices, consult your BMW center or contact Cus- tomer Relations.

Concierge service*

General information The Concierge service of BMW Assist will inform you, for example, about upcoming events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you with their phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge service requires an additional activation by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service"

A voice contact with the BMW Concierge ser- vice is established. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted as a message.

Messages Information about messages, refer to page 190.

Roadside Assistance

At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break- down.

Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance* can also be established using a Check Control mes- sage, refer to page 78.

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

BMW Roadside Assistance number is dis- played. If a mobile phone is paired, a con- nection to BMW Roadside Assistance is established.

C o

n n

ec te

d D

ri ve

200

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices In a vehicle with BMW TeleServices, assistance is first offered through the BMW Teleservice diagnosis and then if necessary, through the BMW Teleservice help.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

3. "Start service"

BMW Teleservice Diagnosis* Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are critical to vehicle diagnosis. Teleservice Diag- nosis can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice con- nection.

BMW Teleservice Help* Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire- less transmission.

Teleservice Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice connection.

Starting BMW Teleservice Help 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. The engine is running.

4. "TeleService Help"

After completion of Teleservice Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis- tance.

BMW Online*

At a glance You can use BMW Online to search the yellow pages.

License conditions:

This product contains NetFront Browser soft- ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other coun- tries.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements > Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan.

> The vehicle is located within wireless net- work coverage.

> The date setting on the Control Display is current.

201

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Starting BMW Online 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "BMW Online"

3. "OK" if necessary

The BMW Online start page is displayed.

Using BMW Online To select and display content:

> Turn the controller to highlight an element.

> Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Reload"

Canceling 1. Open "Options".

2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations

At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Customer Relations"

The Customer Relations phone number is dis- played. If a mobile phone* is paired, a connec- tion is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Customer Relations"

3. "Start service"

Service Request*

At a glance Inform your BMW center that you need to schedule a service appointment. The Teleser- vice data is transmitted during a Service Request. If possible, your BMW center will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Service Request"

C o

n n

ec te

d D

ri ve

202

3. "Start service"

Automatic Service Request* The Teleservice data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. If possible, the center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

Check when your BMW center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Last Service Request"

Service status*

Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Service Status"

3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manually updating BMW TeleServices*, BMW Assist*, and BMW Online*.

"Update BMW Assist"

Data transfer* The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Data transfer"

Apps*

At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.

Requirements > The mobile phone's operating system sup-

ports the use of apps.

> Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and are operational.

> Suitable mobile phone.

> Appropriate mobile phone contract.

Additional costs possibly incurred are not included in the price of apps.

203

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n M

o b

il it

y

Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications, and their instal- lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec- tivity or at your BMW center.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may endanger

vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted. For safety reasons, some software applications can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<

To avoid malfunctions, only use software applications approved by BMW.<

Using apps 1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-

in adapter or the USB audio interface.

2. "ConnectedDrive"

3. Select the desired software application.

Displaying status You can display information about the currently available software applications.

1. "ConnectedDrive"

2. "BMW apps"

Plugin* Selected functions of the mobile phone are dis- played on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.

1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap- in adapter.

2. "ConnectedDrive"

3. "PlugIn"

4. "Activate PlugIn"

5. Use the controller to navigate in the dis- played functions and select the desired cat- egory or track, for example.

Press the button to move one level up or back within the functions of the mobile

phone.

Press the button twice to switch back to the main menu.

Notes > The range of apps that are displayed in the

Control Display depends on the range of software applications installed on the mobile phone.

> The data transfer of the software applica- tions from the mobile phone to the vehicle may take some time. Some software appli- cations are dependent on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

> Certain versions of the mobile phone used and the software they use may not permit apps to be used at the same time as the Bluetooth hands-free system. If necessary, restart the software applica- tion on the mobile phone after completing a call.

Mobility This section helps you maintain your car's

mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and Roadside Assistance.

R ef

u el

in g

206

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu- eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to

the tank and a message will be displayed.<

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<

Fuel filler flap

Opening

1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed

properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes- sage will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or missing.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler flap manually:

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side- wall of the cargo area.

2. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol down. The fuel filler flap is released.

Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations;

otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

> Premature pump shutoff

> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov- ery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 14 US gal/53 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

M o

b il

it y

207

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Fuel specifications Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as metal-containing.

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal-containing additives such as

manganese or iron; doing so can cause perma- nent damage to the catalytic converter or other components.<

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con- taining 85 ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.

Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:

> 128i: 87

> 135i: 89

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Do not use any gasoline below the speci- fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the

engine could be damaged.<

Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif- ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada.

Fuels containing up to and including 10 eth- anol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 oxy- gen by weight, that is, 15 MTBE or 3 meth- anol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental condi- tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.

Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

208

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi- tion that can not only compromise your vehi- cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam- age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

page 87, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 85.<

Inflation pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom-

mended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressures, observe the following:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust

pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

M o

b il

it y

209

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/55 R 16 87 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S

32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 35/240 - 44/300

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 42/290

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/230 36/250 38/260 42/290

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 36/250 - 38/260 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 42/290

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

210

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sport Package

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 36/250 - 41/280

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 35/240 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 41/280

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

with Sport Package

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 39/270 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 36/250 - 46/320

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 45/310

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

M o

b il

it y

211

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 39/270 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 41/280

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

with Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 39/270 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 45/310

Compact spare wheel*: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 60/420

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

212

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed code letter Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT 1011 means that the tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2011.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, (not on ZR tires) Speed code letter, (before the R on ZR tires)

225/45 R 17 91 V

e.g.

Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 1011

M o

b il

it y

213

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 214.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazard and consequential dam- ages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

214

Run-flat tires

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup- porting tire and a special rim. The reinforce- ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric- tions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal- anced.<

Retreaded tires BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may

be impaired. The causes for this include poten- tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

Correct wheels and tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com- bination at your BMW center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been dam- aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi- nation again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 87. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

M o

b il

it y

215

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

When properly used, these tires meet the high- est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +457/+76. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they gener- ally fail to provide the same levels of cold- weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure

to do so could result in tire damage and acci- dents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres- sure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Swapping wheels between axles BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not per- missible.

Snow chains* Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 83.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

216

Under the hood

Do not work on the car unless you pos- sess the necessary technical knowledge.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide- lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Opening

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the engine compartment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.<

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<

M o

b il

it y

217

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Important parts of the engine compartment

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 219

2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean- ing system and window washer system, refer to page 68

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 235

4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Add- ing engine oil, page 219

Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

For precise measurement and display of the oil level, the engine must be at operating tempera- ture, i.e. following at least 6.2 miles/10 km of uninterrupted driving. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

Display in the instrument cluster

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".

2. Press button 2. The oil level is checked and the reading dis- played.

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

218

Possible displays

1 Oil level OK

2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

3 Oil level down to minimum: Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 219.

4 Oil level is too high.

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 221. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages > "Engine oil level OK"

> "Measurement not possible at this time."

> "Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level is below the minimum value, add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.

> "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."*:

M o

b il

it y

219

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately; otherwise, the excess oil may

lead to engine damage.<

> "Measurement inactive. Have this checked.": Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- age until the next oil change service, refer to Service requirements on page 74. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Con- trol Display.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, the engine could be dam-

aged.<

If the engine oil is too high, have the vehi- cle checked immediately; failure to do so

may result in engine damage.<

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant

warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<

Oil grades to add Do not use oil additives as this could result in engine damage.<

When selecting an engine oil, make sure to use one from the SAE viscosity classes

0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do so may result in malfunctions or engine dam- age.<

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Some oil grades may not be available in all countries.

Approved oil grades

Additional information about approved oil grades is available at your BMW center.

Alternative oil types If approved oils are not available, you can add quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the following specifications:

Oil change Oil changes should only be performed by a BMW center.

Coolant Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit- able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may result. Because

additives are harmful to your health, it is impor- tant to follow the instructions on the contain- ers.<

Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.<

Coolant temperature If the coolant and therefore the engine over- heats, a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Gasoline engine

API SM or higher

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

220

Checking coolant level Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

1. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

M o

b il

it y

221

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte- nance costs.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com- prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig- nificant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main- tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 74:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads: separately for front and rear

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote control Your vehicle continuously stores service- requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi- sor can read out this data from the remote con- trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte- nance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set cor- rectly, refer to page 78; otherwise, the

effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

M ai

n te

n an

ce

222

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check- ing components relevant to the composition of the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up: The vehicle is producing higher emis- sions. The trip can be continued. Have

the car checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display this warning lamp.

The lamp flashes under certain condi- tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions- related components, especially the catalytic converter.

The warning lamp comes on if the fuel cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor

is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor- rectly positioned and close it until it audibly clicks.

Data memory Your vehicle records data about the operation, faults, and user settings. These data are stored in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote control, and can be read out using suitable devices at your BMW center. The data that are read out are used to support service proce- dures and repairs or to optimize and expand vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist contract, certain vehicle data can also be trans- mitted directly from the vehicle in order to enable the desired services.

M o

b il

it y

223

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Care

Care products Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi- cantly to the value retention of your BMW.

BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW.

Original BMW CareProducts have been material-tested, laboratory-checked and

proven in the field, and offer optimal care and protection for your vehicle.<

Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in dam-

age.<

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your

health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro- vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles.<

Exterior care

Washing the vehicle Especially during the winter months, ensure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.<

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and brake discs can corrode.<

Automatic car washes Preference should be given to cloth car washes.

Do not use high-pressure car washes; otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle

around the windows.<

Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is suitable for your BMW. Check the following:

> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 243.

> If necessary, fold in the outside rearview mirrors, refer to page 51.

> Maximum permissible tire width.

Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the

danger of damaging chassis parts.<

> In Convertibles, do not treat the convertible top with wax. Ensure that a program is avail- able that does not apply wax or is designed specifically for Convertibles.

Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash:

> Unscrew the rod antenna*.

> Deactivate the rain sensor* to prevent unin- tentional wiping.

> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil- ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos- sibility that they could be damaged.

> Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Automatic transmission Before driving into an automatic car wash, per- form the following steps to ensure that the vehi- cle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

C ar

e

224

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch Before driving into an automatic car wash, per- form the following steps to ensure that the vehi- cle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Engage transmission position N.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

The transmission is switched into position P:

> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes

> If you remove the infrared remote control from the ignition lock

Steam jets/high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient

distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 1407/606. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or temperature can lead to component damage or water penetration. Follow the operating instruc- tions for the steam jet or high-pressure washer.<

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park

Distance Control, for an extended period and maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from them.<

Manual car wash When washing the vehicle by hand, use large quantities of water and car shampoo if neces- sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash- ing brush, applying light pressure only.

Before cleaning the windshield, deacti- vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-

tion to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers.<

Observe local regulations pertaining to washing vehicles by hand.<

Headlamps Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.

Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or insect remover and wash away with copious quantities of water.

Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not use an ice scraper.

Windows Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.

Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.<

Convertible top care The appearance and service life of the convert- ible top largely depends on its proper care and operation.

Please follow these instructions:

> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert- ible top in the convertible compartment when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise, water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may occur.

> If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions, remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.

> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area for a longer period of time, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.

> Remove any bird droppings immediately, since they have corrosive properties which will corrode the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.

To remove stains from the convertible top, do not use stain removers, paint thin-

ners, solvents, benzine or similar substances. These cleaners may damage the rubber seals. The improper care or cleaning methods may cause the convertible top and its seams to leak.<

To remove heavy soiling, use a special convert- ible top cleaner.

M o

b il

it y

225

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions.

After washing the convertible top three to five times, treat it with an impregnating agent.

Paintwork care Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of damaging substances.

Region-specific environmental influences can damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly.

Immediately remove aggressive materials such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint- work.

Repairing paintwork damage Immediately repair scratches or similar damage, such as that caused by stones

hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent rusting.<

BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair work- shop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials.

Preservation A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off the clean paintwork surface. Only use products for paintwork pres- ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.

Rubber seals Treat only with water or rubber care products.

Do not use silicon-containing care prod- ucts on rubber seals; otherwise, noise

and damage could occur.<

Chrome parts Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia- tor grill, door handles or window frames with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive, especially when roads are treated with

deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.

Light-alloy wheels For technical reasons, dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light-alloy wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid- free rim cleaner.

Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline, or abrasive cleaning agents and

do not use steam jets hotter than of 1407/ 606; otherwise, damage may occur.<

Outside sensors/cameras Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park

Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.<

Interior care

Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/ Alcantara fabrics Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt.

To remove severe spots such as stains from beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong

rubbing.<

Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the

seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are closed.<

Leather/leather trim The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight irregularities in the

leather are a typical characteristic of natural leather.<

Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface

C ar

e

226

to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre- quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable.

Treat the leather at least once every two months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.

Carpet and floor mats* Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist- ing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Interior plastic parts > Imitation leather surfaces

> Lamp glasses

> Display pane of instrument cluster

> Matte parts

Clean with water and solvent-free plastic cleaner if necessary.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.<

Interior sensors/cameras To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of the High-beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.

Displays To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.

Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage

may occur.<

Do not use chemical or abrasive house- hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of

fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged.<

CD/DVD drives Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam- age parts of the drive.<

Vehicle storage If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for longer than three months, your BMW center or a workshop that operates according to BMW specifications will be glad to advise you.

M o

b il

it y

227

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Replacing components

Onboard vehicle tool kit The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored below the floor mat in the cargo area.

Wiper blades

1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.

2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech- anism, pulling the blade toward the front.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav- ing your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch; otherwise, you could suffer

burns.<

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<

If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact

your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.<

Light-emitting diodes LED Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in con- ventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours; otherwise, this could cause irritation of the retina.<

Headlight lenses In cool or humid weather, condensation may form on the interior of outside lamps. When the light is switched on, the condensation will dis- appear after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.

At high humidities, e.g. water droplets may form in the lights; have these checked by your BMW center.

Xenon lamps* These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never- theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

228

the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed

only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<

Removing the headlamp cover 1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see

arrows, and fold to the side.

2. Fold away the headlamp cover.

Be careful when attaching the headlamp cover and ensure that both wire brackets

are securely in place; otherwise, leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp sys- tem.<

Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.

Halogen headlamps

Halogen low beams and high beams H7 bulb, 55 watts

Always wear gloves and eye protection; the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1 High beams

2 Low-beam headlamps

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.

3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down, arrow 2.

4. Remove the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb with the notch at the top.

6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.

7. Connect the plug.

8. Attach the headlamp cover.

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

2. Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder.

5. Attach the headlamp cover.

M o

b il

it y

229

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Xenon headlamps

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights H8 bulb, 35 watts

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.

4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

5. Attach the headlamp cover.

Corner-illuminating lamp* H3 bulb, 55 watts

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the screwdriver to push the detents to one side.

2. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off the connector.

4. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.

5. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

6. Attach the headlamp cover.

Turn signals, front PY21W bulb, 21 watts

The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch.

1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.

2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the cover.

3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove it, arrow 2.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the right.

6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

230

Side turn signals W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Press the rear edge of the lamp toward the front with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it out, arrow 2.

2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove lamp and replace it.

To install, insert front end of the lamp and press into place at the back.

Tail lamps with halogen headlamps > Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts

> Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts

1 Inner brake lamp/tail lamp

2 Outer brake lamp/parking/tail lamp

3 Reflector

4 Lateral reflector

5 Turn signal

6 Backup lamp

7 Brake Force Display lamp/tail lamp

Tail lamps with xenon headlamps > Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts

> Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts

1 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED

2 Inner brake lamp

3 Outer brake lamp

4 Reflector

5 Lateral reflector

6 Turn signal

7 Backup lamp

8 Brake Force Display lamp

M o

b il

it y

231

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Replacing tail lamps

Outer brake lamp

The outer brake lamp can be accessed through a single socket.

The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo area.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

5. Reattach the cover.

With Xenon headlamps, the parking/tail lamp uses LED technology. After replac-

ing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is prop- erly seated; otherwise, the roadside parking lamp/tail lamp may not work.<

Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup lamp and Brake Force Display lamp

The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo area.

2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing together the clips, see arrows, and remove it.

3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket and replace it.

5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into place.

6. Reattach the cover.

License plate lamps, center brake lamp, and parking/tail lamp* These lamps use LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as standard. This eliminates the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-flat tires, page 214.

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 214.

The tools for changing wheels are avail- able as optional accessories from your

BMW center.<

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

232

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Battery replacing Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manu-

facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam- aged and systems or functions may not be fully available.<

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.

Charging the battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting on page 235.

Disposal Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or bring them to a recycling

center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi- tion for transport and storage. Always secure

the battery against tipping over during trans- port.<

Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:

> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 76.

> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 147.

> Navigation system Wait for the system to start, refer to page 141.

> Glass roof It may happen that the roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.

> Seat and mirror memory* The positions must be stored again, refer to page 50.

> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 107.

> Active steering The system automatically initializes itself briefly during a trip. The system is deacti- vated during this time, refer to page 89.

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating; oth- erwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti- mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

M o

b il

it y

233

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

In the glove compartment

Accessing the fuse box:

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the lower holder by applying forward pressure.

3. Disengage the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it down.

Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor box. Information on fuse assignment can be found next to the distributor box.

Spare fuses are available from your BMW cen- ter.

After replacing a fuse, press the glove compart- ment upward until it engages and reattach the damper.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

234

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency Request*

Requirements > Full preparation package mobile phone: this

equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated.

> Radio readiness is switched on.

> The BMW Assist system is logged into a mobile phone network that is supported by BMW Assist.

> The Emergency Request system is opera- ble.

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed

for the most unfavorable conditions.<

Subscriber contract Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without a work- shop visit.

After the system is deactivated, it is no longer possible to make Emergency Requests.

It may be possible for a BMW center to reacti- vate the system after a new contract has been signed.

Sending an Emergency Request 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button comes on.

> The LED comes on: the Emergency Request has been triggered.

If the circumstances allow, remain in the vehicle until the voice contact has been established.

> The LED flashes when the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established.

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.

Data for determining the necessary rescue measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the cur- rent position of your vehicle, if it can be determined.

> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you, however.

Automatically triggering an Emergency Request Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. An automatic Emergency Request is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Roadside Assistance BMW Roadside Assistance is available by phone around the clock in many countries. You

M o

b il

it y

235

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

can obtain support there in the event of a break- down.

First aid pouch* Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents reg- ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec- essary.

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo area in a storage area.

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located in a holder in the trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Jump-starting If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent sparking at the battery,

which could cause injury.<

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat- tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 217. The cap is marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con- nection up to remove.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi- cle providing assistance.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

236

3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting, towing away Observe the applicable laws and regula- tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-

cles.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is stored with the onboard vehicle tool kit underneath the floor mat in the cargo area, refer to page 227.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Access to screw thread Rectangular cover panel in bumper:

Press the arrow on the cover.

Front

M o

b il

it y

237

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Rear

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 57; otherwise, the low-beam

headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable. There is no power assist while the engine is off. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever position, refer to page 60.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/ 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged.<

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch

Make sure that the parking lock P is not engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are

immobilized. When using the car wash function, refer to page 224, make sure that after approx. 30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels. In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the vehicle must be towed for more than approx. 20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually, refer to page 65.<

When towing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-

mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth- erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<

BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on a tow truck with a flatbed or towing with the rear axle raised.

Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, dam-

age may result.<

With a tow bar The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle

could result in damage.<

With a tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

238

With a tow truck Manual transmission and automatic transmis- sion:

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch:

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.

Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.

Tow-starting Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi- ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 235. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission or Sport automatic transmission with double clutch cannot be tow-started at all.

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch completely depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

M o

b il

it y

239

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Reference This chapter contains technical data,

short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will help you find information most quickly.

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

242

Technical data

Engine data

128i 135i

Displacement cu in/cm 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979

Number of cylinders 6 6

Maximum power output hp 230 300

at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407

at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,300-5,000

R e

fe re

n ce

243

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m 135i: height 55.4 in/1,408 mm

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

244

Convertible

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m 135i: height 54.8 in/1,392 mm

R e

fe re

n ce

245

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Weights

Coupe

Convertible

128i 135i

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930

> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,211/1,910

> Sport automatic transmission with double clutch

lbs./kg 4,321/1,960

Load lbs./kg 794/360 794/360

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,028/920 2,116/960

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,293/1,040 2,293/1,040

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 13.1/370 13.1/370

128i 135i

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,398/1,995 4,541/2,060

> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,475/2,030

> Sport automatic transmission with double clutch

lbs./kg 4,608/2,090

Load lbs./kg 750/340 750/340

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,050/930 2,161/980

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,467/1,119 2,469/1,120

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 9.1-10.7/260-305 9.1-10.7/260-305

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

246

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel grade: page 207

including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0

Window washer system For more details: page 68including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0

R e

fe re

n ce

247

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Short commands for the voice activation system

For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 23.

Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

The following short commands are for vehicles with the voice activation system. They do not function with equipment packages that permit only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.

Useful short commands

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive

*

Function Command

Opening a music collection {Music collection}

Opening the tone control {Tone}

Opening the settings {Settings}

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Opening the contacts* {Contacts}

Displaying the phone book* {Phonebook}

Opening services* {Assist}

Opening BMW Assist* {B M W Assist}

Accessing ConnectedDrive* {Connected Drive}

Opening the home address* {Home address}

Opening destination entry* {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance* {Guidance}

Function Command

Selecting a track {Track } e.g. track 5

or

{C D track } e.g. CD track 5

Playing back a CD {C D on}

Selecting a CD {Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track {C D track } e.g. CD 3 track 5

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s fo

r t h

e vo

ic e

ac ti

va ti

o n

s ys

te m

248

Music collection

External devices

Tone control

Radio

FM

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD* {C D}

Displaying entertainment details on the split screen*

{Entertainment details}

Function Command

Function Command

Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}

Calling up the current playback {Current playback}

Opening a music collection {Music collection}

Playing back a music collection {Music collection on}

Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}

Function Command

Opening external devices {External devices}

Accessing Bluetooth devices* {Bluetooth}

AUX front {AUX}

Function Command

Opening the tone control {Tone}

Function Command

Selecting a station directly {Station } e.g. National Public Radio

Calling up the radio {Radio}

Calling up an FM station {F M}

Opening manual search {Manual}

Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}

Calling up a station {Select station}

R e

fe re

n ce

249

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

AM

Satellite radio

Presets

Telephone*

Office*

Function Command

Calling up an AM station {A M}

Opening manual search {Manual}

Function Command

Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}

Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}

Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2

Function Command

Opening the stored stations {Presets}

Choosing a stored station {Select preset}

Selecting a stored station {Preset } e.g. stored station 2

Function Command

Dialing a phone number {Dial number}

Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}

Displaying phone book {Phonebook}

Redialing {Redial}

Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}

Displaying the list of messages {Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}

Function Command

Opening Office menu {Office}

Displaying current Office {Current office}

Displaying contacts {Contacts}

Displaying messages {Messages}

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s fo

r t h

e vo

ic e

ac ti

va ti

o n

s ys

te m

250

Contacts*

Navigation*

General information

Displaying calendar {Calendar}

Displaying tasks {Tasks}

Displaying reminders {Reminders}

Function Command

Function Command

Selecting a name {Choose name}

Opening the contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}

New contact {New contact}

Function Command

Navigation menu {Navigation}

Opening destination entry {Enter address}

Entering an address {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance {Guidance}

Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}

Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}

Opening the home address {Home address}

Opening the route criteria {Route preference}

Opening the route {Route information}

Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}

Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}

Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}

Displaying the address book {Address book}

Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}

Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}

Special destinations {Points of interest}

R e

fe re

n ce

251

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Map

Split screen* settings

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Displaying the map {Map}

Map facing north {Map facing north}

Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}

Perspective map {Map perspective view}

Automatic map scaling* {Map with automatic scaling}

Changing the scale {Map scale}

Scale...meters* {Map scale meters} e.g. map scale of 100 meters

Scale...kilometers* {Map scale kilometers} e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers

Function Command

Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}

Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}

Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}

Split screen, current position {Split screen current position}

Split screen, map facing north {Split screen map facing north}

Split screen, direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}

Split screen, perspective {Split screen perspective}

Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}

Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen {Splitscreen Exit ramp view}

Split screen scale ... meters* {Split screen scale meters} e.g. split screen scale of 100 meters

Split screen scale ... kilometers* {Split screen scale kilometers} e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers

Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins {Split screen, Traffic conditions}

Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}

Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}

Function Command

Entering a new destination {Enter address}

Trip list {Stored trips}

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s fo

r t h

e vo

ic e

ac ti

va ti

o n

s ys

te m

252

ConnectedDrive* or BMW Assist*

Vehicle information

Settings

Vehicle

Equipment

Function Command

Opening BMW Assist* {B M W Assist}

Accessing ConnectedDrive* {Connected Drive}

Opening BMW Search* {B M W Online}

Function Command

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}

Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}

Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}

Function Command

Opening the main menu {Main menu}

Opening the settings {Settings}

Opening the options {Options}

Settings on the Control Display {Control display}

Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}

Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}

Opening the speed limit settings {Speed}

Opening the light settings {Lighting}

Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}

Opening profiles {Profiles}

Function Command

Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}

R e

fe re

n ce

253

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

254

Everything from A to Z

Index

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 83 Acceleration assistant, refer to

Launch Control 66 Accessories, refer to Your

individual vehicle 5 Accident, reporting, refer to

Emergency Request 234 Activated-charcoal filter 102 Active steering 89 Adaptive Light Control 95 Additives coolant 219 engine oil 219 Address, entering 125, 131 Address for navigation entering 125 Adjusting temperature 100 Airbags 90 sitting safely 45 warning lamp 92 Air conditioner 99 Air distribution automatic 100 Airing, refer to Ventilation 102 Air outlets, refer to Air

vents 99 Air pressure, checking, refer

to Tire inflation pressure 208

Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated air mode 101

Air vents 99 Air volume 101 AKI, refer to Fuel grade 207 Alarm system 34 avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 interior motion sensor 35 switching off an alarm 34 tilt alarm sensor 35

Albums of music collection 163

ALL program 101 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 215 AM, waveband 147 Ambient air, refer to

Recirculated air mode 101 Antifreeze coolant 219 washer fluid 68 Antilock Brake System

ABS 83 Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 34 Anti-theft system 29 Appointments, refer to

Calendar 193 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 245 Approved engine oils 219 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 245 Apps 202 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 108 Arrival time computer 72 Ashtray 109 Assistance systems, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83

AUC Automatic recirculated air control 101

Audible instructions, refer to Voice instructions 136

Audio 144 controls 144 switching on/off 144 tone control 144 volume 144

Automatic air distribution 100 air volume 100 cruise control 68 headlamp control 94 Automatic car washes 223 Automatic climate control 99 Automatic curb monitor 52 Automatic high beams and

low beams, refer to High- beam Assistant 96

Automatic lamps refer to Welcome lamps 94 Automatic recirculated air

control AUC 101 Automatic Service

Request 202 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59 selector lever lock 60 shiftlock 60 towing 236 tow-starting 236 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 100 AUX-IN port 166 Available services 202 Average fuel consumption 72 setting the units 74 Average speed 72 Avoid highways in

navigation 134 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 245

B Backrests, refer to Seats 46 Backrest width adjustment 47 Back seats, refer to Rear seats adjusting head restraints 48

R e

fe re

n ce

255

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Backup lamp, replacing bulb 231

Bag for skis, refer to Ski bag 110

Band-aids, refer to First aid pouch 235

Bar, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 237

Base plate for telephone or mobile phone

refer to Snap-in adapter 186 Bass, tone setting 144 Battery 232 charging 232 disposal 37, 232 jump-starting 235 replacing 232 temporary power failure 232 Battery renewal remote control for vehicle 37 Being towed 237 Belts, refer to Safety belts 50 Belt tensioner, refer to Safety

belts 50 Beverage holders, refer to

Cupholders 108 Blower, refer to Air

volume 101 Bluetooth, activating/

deactivating 177 Bluetooth audio 169 disconnecting an audio

connection 171 pairing a device 169 playback 170 unpairing device 171 What to do if... 171 BMW car shampoo 224 BMW Assist 198 updating 202 BMW Maintenance

System 221 BMW Online* 200 BMW TeleServices 199 Bottle holders, refer to

Cupholders 108 Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic

Brake Control 83

Brake fluid service requirements 74 Brake Force Display 90 Brake lamps Brake Force Display 90 replacing bulb 231 Brake pads, breaking in 116 Brake pedal, refer to Braking

safely 118 Brake rotors 118 brakes 116 breaking in 116 Brakes ABS 83 BMW Maintenance

System 221 braking safely 118 breaking in 116 parking brake 59 service requirements 74 Brake system 116 BMW Maintenance

System 221 breaking in 116 disc brakes 118 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 234 Breaking in the clutch 116 Break-in period 116 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps

and bulbs 227 Button for starting the

engine 57 Buttons on the steering

wheel 11

C Calendar 193 displaying appointment 193 selecting calendar day 193 California Proposition 65

warning 6 Call accepting 181 ending 181 muting the microphone 182 rejecting 181

Calling, refer to Phone numbers, dialing 181

Calling, refer to Telephone owner's manual

Calls with multiple parties 181 Can holders, refer to

Cupholders 108 Capacities 246 Capacity of the cargo area 245 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 232 Car care, refer to Care 223 Care 223 automatic car washes 223 care products 223 carpets 226 CD/DVD drives 226 chrome parts 225 convertible top 224 displays 226 exterior 223 fine wood parts 226 headlamps 224 high-pressure washer 224 interior 225 leather 225 light-alloy wheels 225 paintwork 225 plastic parts 226 rubber seals 225 safety belts 226 sensors and cameras 226 upholstery and cloth

trim 225 washing the car

manually 224 windows 224 Cargo, securing 120 Cargo area capacity 245 Comfort Access 36 enlarging, refer to Through-

loading system 109 lamp, refer to Interior

lamps 98 lid, refer to Trunk lid 33 opening from outside 33

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

256

Cargo area lid, refer to Trunk lid 33

Cargo area net, refer to Securing cargo 120

Cargo loading 119 securing cargo 120 stowing cargo 120 vehicle 119 Car jack jacking points 232 Car key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 28 Car phone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 108 refer to separate Owner's

Manual Car phone, refer to

Telephone 176 Car radio, refer to Radio 147 Car shampoo 224 Car wash 223 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 117 CD, audio playback 155 CD changer 155, 159 controls 144 fast forward/reverse 157 filling or emptying the

magazine 159 random play sequence 156 selecting a track 155 switching on/off 144 tone control 144 volume 144 CD player 155 controls 144 fast forward/reverse 157 random order 156 selecting a track 155 switching on/off 144 tone control 144 volume 144 Center armrest 108 Center brake lamp, replacing

bulb 231 Center console, refer to

Around the center console 14

Central key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28

Central locking from inside 32 from outside 29 Central locking system 29 Comfort Access 35 Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5 Changing bulbs 227 Changing gears 64 Changing the language on the

Control Display 81 Changing wheels 231 Chassis number, refer to

Engine compartment 217 Check Control 78 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 55 Child restraint systems 54 Child seats 54 Chrome parts 225 Chrome polish 225 Cigarette lighter 109 Cleaning headlamps 67 washer fluid 68 Cleaning your BMW, refer to

Care 223 Climate control automatic air

distribution 100 Clock 70 12h/24h mode 77 setting the time and date 77 setting time 76 Closing from inside 32 from outside 29 Clothes hooks 108 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 58 Comfort Access 35 replacing the battery 37 Comfort access, refer to

Comfort Access 35 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 14

Compartment for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 57

Compass 106 Computer 71 displays on Control

Display 72 Computer, refer to iDrive 16 Concierge service 199 Condensation, refer to When

the vehicle is parked 119 Condition Based Service

CBS 221 Configuring settings, refer to

Personal Profile 28 Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking the vehicle 30

ConnectedDrive 198 Connecting vacuum cleaner,

refer to Connecting electrical appliances 109

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 72

Contacts 188 deleting 190, 197 exporting/importing 197 new contact 189 Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16 Control Display 16, 17 Control Display, refer to iDrive switching on/off 17 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls and displays 10 Convenient opening and

closing windows 30 windows with Comfort

Access 36 with Comfort Access 36 Convenient start, refer to

Starting the engine 58 Convertible rollover protection

system 92 top 40 wind deflector 43

R e

fe re

n ce

257

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Convertible top convenient opening 30 Convertible top care 224 Coolant 219 checking level 220 filling 220 Coolant temperature 219 Cooling, maximum 100 Cooling fluid, refer to

Coolant 219 Copyright 2 Corner-illuminating lamps 95 Cornering light, refer to

Adaptive Light Control 95 Country codes DVD 157 Courtesy lamps 98 Criteria for route 134 Cross-hairs in navigation 130 Cruise control 68 Cruising range 72 Cupholders 108 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 245 Current fuel consumption 72 Current playback external devices 168 of music collection 163 Customer Relations 201

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10 Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 98 Data, technical 242 capacities 246 dimensions 243 engine 242 weights 245 Data memory 222 Data transfer 202 Date setting 78 setting format 78 Daytime running lights, switch

positions 95 DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 83

Deactivating front passenger airbags 91

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 30

Defect door lock 32 fuel filler flap 206 glass roof 40 Defining a home address 190 Defogging windows 101 Defrosting windows 101 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 101 Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 101 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 101 Destination, entering by town/

city name 125 Destination address entering 125, 131 Destination entry via BMW

Assist 129 Destination for navigation entering by voice 131 entering via map 130 entry 125 home address 128 manual entry 125 Destination guidance 134 bypassing a route

section 135 changing specified

route 134 continuing 134 starting 134 voice instructions 136 volume of voice

instructions 136 Differential, breaking in 116 Digital clock 70, 76 Digital compass 106 Digital radio, refer to HD

Radio 148 Dimensions 243 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 66 Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 136

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 127

Displacement, refer to Engine data 242

Display, refer to Control Display 16

Displaying contact pictures 190

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 98

Displays, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Displays and controls 10 Disposal of coolant 219 remote control battery 37 vehicle battery 232 Distance, refer to

Computer 72 Distance remaining to service,

refer to Service requirements 74

Distance to destination, refer to Computer 72

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 82

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28

Door lock 32 Door lock, confirmation

signals 30 Doors, manual operation 32 DOT Quality Grades 212 Draft-free ventilation 102 Drinks holders, refer to

Cupholders 108 Drive mode 63 Drive-off assistance, refer to

DSC 83 Drive-off assistant 84 Driving dynamics control 64 Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 94 Driving notes 116 Driving off on hills, refer to

Drive-off assistant 84 Driving stability control

systems 83

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

258

Driving through water 118 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 116 Dry air, refer to Cooling

function 101 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 83 DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 84 indicator lamps 84 DVD country codes 157 settings 158 video playback 157 DVD menu 158 DVD player, refer to CD

player 155 DVD video 157 Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 83 Dynamic destination

guidance 140 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 83 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 84 indicator lamps 84

E EBV Electronic brake-force

distribution 83 Eject button, refer to Buttons

on the CD/DVD player 144 Electrical defect 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 65

Electrical malfunction door lock 32 fuel filler flap 206 glass roof 40 Electronic brake-force

distribution EBV 83 Electronic oil level check 217 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83

Email 192

Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation

door lock 32 fuel filler flap 206 glass roof 40 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 61 Emergency release, trunk

lid 34 Emergency Request 234 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 234 Energy, saving saving fuel 116 Engine breaking in 116 data 242 speed 242 starting 58 starting, Comfort Access 35 switching off 58 Engine compartment 217 Engine coolant, refer to

Coolant 219 Engine oil adding 219 additives 219 alternative oil types 219 approved engine oils 219 BMW Maintenance

System 221 checking level 217 intervals between changes,

refer to Service requirements 74

Engine oil level, checking 217 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 242 Engine speed, refer to Engine

data 242 Engine starting, refer to

Starting the engine 58 Entering the postal code for

navigation 126 Entry map for destination 130 Equalizer, tone setting 145 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 117

Exterior mirrors 51 adjusting 51 automatic dimming

feature 52 automatic heating 52 folding in and out 51 External devices random play sequence 168 software update 172 Eyes for tow-starting and towing

away 236 for tying down loads 120

F Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 78 Failure of an electrical

consumer 232 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 35 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 50 Fastest route for

navigation 134 Fast forward CD changer 157 CD player 157 Filter of automatic climate

control, refer to Microfilter/ activated charcoal filter 102

First aid pouch 235 Fixture for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 57 Flash when locking/

unlocking 30 Flat tire run-flat tires 214 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 86 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84 indicating a flat tire 85 initializing the system 85 system limits 84 Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 213

R e

fe re

n ce

259

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

FM, waveband 147 Fog lamps 97 indicator lamp 13, 97 Footwell lamps 98 For your own safety 5 Free memory capacity, music

collection 164 Front airbags 90 Front seat adjustment 46 Frost on windows, refer to

Defrosting windows 101 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 84 Fuel 207 gauge 71 high-quality brands 207 quality 207 specifications 207 tank contents, refer to

Capacities 246 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 71 Fuel consumption indicator,

refer to Average fuel consumption 72

Fuel consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 72

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 71

Fuel filler flap 206 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 206 Fuses 232

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 104

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 207

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 71

Gas station recommendations 136

Gear display, with automatic transmission 60

Gear shifting automatic transmission 60 manual transmission 59 Gearshift lever 62 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 60 manual transmission 59 General driving notes 117 Glass roof, electric 39 closing after electrical

malfunction 40 convenient opening and

closing 32 convenient opening and

closing with Comfort Access 36

opening, closing 39 pinch protection system 39 remote control 30 tilting 39 Glove compartment 107 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 124 Grills, refer to Air vents 99 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 245

H Halogen lamps replacing bulbs 228 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 59 Hands-free system 184 Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone for hands-free mode 14

Hazard warning flashers 14 HD Radio 148 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control,

automatic 94 Headlamp cover 228 Headlamp flasher 66 indicator lamp 13 Headlamps replacing bulbs 228

Head Light, refer to Adaptive Light Control 95

Head restraints 48 Heated seats 50 steering wheel 53 Heated mirrors 52 Heating mirrors 52 seats 50 steering wheel 53 Heating, rear window 101 Heating and ventilation 99 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing

cargo 120 Height, refer to

Dimensions 243 Height adjustment steering wheel 52 High-beam Assistant 96 High beams 96 indicator lamp 13 replacing bulbs 228 High beams and low beams,

automatic, refer to High- beam Assistant 96

High-pressure washer 223, 224

High water, refer to Driving through water 118

Highways, refer to Route criteria 134

Hills 118 Holders for cups 108 Hood 216 Hot exhaust system 117 Hydraulic brake assist, refer to

Dynamic Brake Control 83 Hydroplaning 117

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

260

I IBOC, refer to HD Radio 148 Ice warning, refer to Outside

temperature warning 70 Identification marks tire coding 212 iDrive 16 adjusting brightness 81 changing date and time 77 changing language 81 menu guidance 17 operating principle 16 status information 19 Ignition 57 switched off 58 switched on 57 Ignition key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 28

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 57

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 57

Ignition lock 57 Imprint 2 Incoming call 180 Indicator and warning

lamps 13 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 87 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 28 Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 86

Initializing compass, refer to

Calibrating 107 radio, refer to Station,

storing 147 refer to Setting the time and

date 77 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 85 Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 136

Instrument cluster 12 Instrument combination, refer

to Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 98 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote

control 104 Interactive map 130 Interior lamps 98 remote control 30 Interior motion sensor 35 Interior rearview mirror 52 automatic dimming

feature 52 compass 106 Intermittent mode of the

wipers 67 Intersection, entering,

navigation 126 iPod, connecting, refer to

AUX-IN port 166 iPod, connecting, refer to USB

audio interface 166

J Jacking points 232 Jets, refer to Air vents 99 Jets, refer to Window washer

nozzles 68 Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering, refer to Jump-

starting 235 Jump-starting 235

K Key, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 28 Keyless go, refer to Comfort

Access 35 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 35 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 28 Keypad dialing 182 Kickdown 60 Knock control 207

L Lamps Adaptive Light Control 95 interior lighting 98 Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

Low beams 94 Lamps and bulbs, replacing

bulbs 227 Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 120 Last destinations 128 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 55 Launch Control 66 Leather care 225 LED Light-emitting

diodes 227 Length, refer to

Dimensions 243 License plate lamp, replacing

bulb 231 Light instrument lighting 98 refer to High-beam

Assistant 96 Light-alloy wheels 225 Light control refer to High-beam

Assistant 96 Light-emitting diodes

LED 227 Lighter 109 socket 109 Lighting lamps and bulbs 227 of the instruments 98 of vehicle, refer to Lamps 94 Light switch 94 Limit, refer to Speed limit 80 Load 119 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 120 Lock buttons of doors, refer to

Locking 33

R e

fe re

n ce

261

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Locking adjusting confirmation

signal 30 from inside 33 from outside 30 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 35 Locking and unlocking doors from inside 32 from outside 29 Low beam control, refer to

High-beam Assistant 96 Low-beam headlamps 94 automatic 94 replacing bulbs 228 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 47 Luggage compartment, refer

to Cargo area Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 120 Lumbar support 47

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 215 Maintenance, refer to BMW Maintenance

System 221 Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Maintenance system 221 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 78 Manual car wash 224 Manually unlocking parking

lock 65

Manual operation door lock 32 fuel filler flap 206 glass roof 40 parking lock 65 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 61 Manual operation with

automatic transmission 61 Manual transmission 59 Map for navigation changing scale 137 entering destination 130 Map view 136 Maximum cooling 100 Maximum speed for winter tires 215 Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Messages 190 Messages from the Concierge

service 192 Microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter for automatic climate control 102

Microphone for telephone 14 Mirror dimming feature 52 Mirrors 51 automatic curb monitor 52 exterior mirrors 51 heating 52 interior rearview mirror 52 Mobile phone adjusting volume 180 connecting, refer to Mobile

phone, pairing 176 operation 180 pairing 176 suitable mobile phones 176 unpairing 179 What to do if 179 Mobile phone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 108

Mobile phone, refer to Telephone 176

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Mobile phone audio interface 166

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring system for tire

pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84

MP3 player, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 166

MP3 player, connecting, refer to USB audio interface 166

Multi-channel playback 145 Multifunctional steering

wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 66 refer to Wiper system 67 Music, managing 164 Music collection 161 backup 165 deleting 165 random sequence 164 restoring 165 Music player, connecting,

refer to AUX-IN port 166 Music player, connecting,

refer to USB audio interface 166

Music search 162 My Info 192

N Navigation starting destination

guidance after entering a destination 126

storing current position 127 voice activation 131 Navigation announcements,

refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 136

Navigation data 124

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

262

Navigation system 124 address book 127 bypassing a route

section 135 continuing destination

guidance 134 destination entry 125 dynamic destination

guidance 140 entering a destination by

voice 131 entering a destination

manually 125 frequently asked

questions 141 gas station

recommendations 136 planning a trip 132 route list 135 selecting destination via

map 130 selecting route criteria 134 special destinations 128 starting destination

guidance 134 terminating destination

guidance 134 traffic bulletins 138 voice instructions 136 volume adjustment 136 Neck support, refer to Head

restraints 48 Nets, refer to Storage

compartments 108 Neutral 63 New tires 214 Next Service indicator, refer to

Condition Based Service CBS 221

North-facing map 136 Notes 194 Number of cylinders, refer to

Engine data 242

O OBD socket, refer to Socket

for Onboard Diagnosis 222 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 207 Odometer 70 Office 188 current office 188 What to do if 195 Oil, refer to Engine oil 217 Oil consumption 217 Oil level 217 Old batteries, refer to

Disposal 232 Onboard vehicle tool kit 227 Opening and closing Comfort Access 35 from inside 32 from outside 29 using the door lock 32 using the remote control 29 Options, selecting for

navigation 134 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17 Outlets, refer to

Ventilation 102 Output, refer to Engine

data 242 Outside temperature

display 70 changing unit of measure 74 in computer 74 Outside temperature

warning 70 Overriding selector lever

lock 61 Overview radio control 144

P Paintwork care 225 Park assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control 82 Park Distance Control PDC 82

Parked car ventilation 102 preselecting switch-on

times 103 switching on and off

directly 102 Parking vehicle 58 Parking aid, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 82 Parking brake 59 indicator lamp 59 Parking lamps/low beams 94 replacing bulbs 228 Parts and accessories, refer to

Your individual vehicle 5 Passenger side mirror tilt

function 52 Pathway lighting 95 Personal information, refer to

Office 188 Personal Profile 28 Phone numbers dialing 181 Phone reception level, refer to

Status information 19 Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 39 windows 38 Playing music 162 Polish 225 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 102 Power windows 37 Power windows, refer to

Windows 37 Pressure, tires 208 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 86

Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11

Programmable memory keys 21

Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system

glass roof, electric 39 windows 38

R e

fe re

n ce

263

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Providing medical assistance, refer to First aid pouch 235

Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 84

R Radio controls 144 HD Radio 148 satellite radio 150 selecting waveband 147 storing stations 147 switching on/off 144 tone control 144 volume 144 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 57 Radio readiness 57 switched off 58 switched on 57 Rain sensor 67 Random play sequence external devices 168 Random sequence music collection 164 Reading aloud 194 Reading lamps 98 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 230 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 48 folding down backrests 109 Rearview mirror, refer to

Mirrors 51 Rear window defroster 101 Reception quality 148 radio station 148 Recirculated air mode 101 Recirculation of air, refer to

Recirculated air mode 101 Redialing 183 Reflectors, refer to Tail

lamps 230 Refueling 206 Releasing hood 216

Remaining distance, refer to Computer 72

Remaining distance, refer to Cruising range 72

Reminders 194 Remote control 28 battery renewal 37 Comfort Access 35 garage door opener 104 malfunctions 31, 36 removing from the ignition

lock 57 service data 221 trunk lid 30 Remote control key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 28

Replacement fuses, refer to Fuses 232

Replacement remote control 28

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 227

Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 214

Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 71 Reservoir for washer

systems 68 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 146 Restraint systems, refer to

Safety belts 50 Restraint systems for

children 54 Retreaded tires 214 Reverse CD changer 157 CD player 157 Reverse gear 63 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 60 manual transmission 59 Road map 136 Roadside

Assistance 199, 234

Roadside parking lamps 96 replacing bulbs 228 Roadworthiness test, refer to

Service requirements 74 Rollover protection system,

Convertible 92 resetting 92 Roof load capacity 245 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 120 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 237 Rotary/pushbutton control,

refer to Controller 16 Route 134, 135 bypassing sections 135 changing 134, 135 changing criteria 134 displaying streets or towns/

cities 135 map view 136 selecting 134 Route instructions, refer to

Destination guidance through voice instructions 136

Route map, refer to Map view 136

Route section, changing 135 Route selection 134 RSC Runflat System

Component, refer to Run- flat tires 214

Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 214

Run-flat tires 214, 215 flat tire 85 inflation pressure 208 new tires 214 remaining driving distance,

refer to Indication of a flat tire 85

tire replacement 214 Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat

tires 214

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

264

S Safety-belt height

adjustment 51 Safety belts 50 damage 51 indicator lamp 51 reminder 51 sitting safely 45 Safety systems airbags 90 Antilock Brake System

ABS 83 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 83 rollover protection system,

Convertible 92 safety belts 50 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 214 Satellite radio 150 enabling or unsubscribing

from a channel 150 favorites 152 selecting channel 151 storing channel 151 timeshift 152 Traffic Jump 153 Saving fuel 116 Screen, refer to iDrive 16 Screw thread for tow

fitting 236 SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 150 Seat and mirror memory 50 Seat belt reminder, refer to

'Fasten safety belts' reminder 51

Seats 46 heating 50 sitting safely 45 Securing cargo 111, 112 Selecting new scale for

navigation 137 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 60

Selector lever positions 62

Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 234

Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 234

Service data in remote control 221

Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 221

Service Request 201 Service requirements 74 Service status 202 Settings clock, 12h/24h format 77 date format 78 DVD 158 language 81 Settings for the map view 137 Setting times, refer to

Preselecting switch-on times 103

Shifting 64 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 63

Shifting gears with automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

Shift into a drive position, refer to selector lever positions 62

Shiftlock, refer to Changing selector lever positions 60

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 64

Short commands for the voice activation system 247

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 134

Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 156 CD player 156 Side airbags 90 Side windows, refer to

Windows 37 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 45 airbags 45 safety belts 45

Ski bag 110 Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to

Glass roof, electric 39 Slot for remote control 57 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 109 Snap-in adapter 176 inserting/removing 186 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Center armrest 108 Snow chains 215 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical appliances 109 Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

OBD 222 Software update 172 Sound, adjusting during audio

playback, refer to Tone control 144

Sound output for entertainment on/off 144

Spare fuses 232 Special destinations 128 Special destinations,

displaying 129 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 219 Specified engine oils, refer to

Approved engine oils 219 Speed for winter tires 215 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 80 Speedo, refer to

Speedometer 12 Speedometer 12 Speed Volume 145 Split screen content, refer to

Selecting the display for the split screen content 20

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 62

driving dynamics control 64 kickdown 63 Launch Control 66 manually unlocking parking

lock 65 neutral 63 reverse gear 63

R e

fe re

n ce

265

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Sport program, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

Sport program with 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 63

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 83

Start/Stop button 57 starting the engine 58 switching off the engine 58 Starting, refer to Starting the

engine 58 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump-starting 235 Starting the engine Start/Stop button 57 Start menu 17 State/province, for

navigation 125 Station, selecting radio 147 Status information on the

Control Display 19 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5 Steam jet 223, 224 Steering wheel 52 adjustment 52 buttons on steering

wheel 11 heating 53 shift paddles 64 Steering wheel buttons, refer

to Shift paddles 64 Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 89 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Steptronic 59

Storage 226 Storage compartment

package 108 Storage compartments 108 Stored trip, calling up 132

Storing seat position, refer to Seat

and mirror memory 50 telephone numbers, refer to

separate Owner's Manual Storing a destination in the

address book 127 Storing music 161 Storing tires 215 Stowage, refer to Storage

compartments 108 Street, entering,

navigation 126 Suitable mobile phones 176 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 208 Surround 145 SVCD 157 SW, waveband 147 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 58 Switching off the engine Start/Stop button 57 Switching on audio 144 CD changer 144 CD player 144 radio 144 Switching the cooling function

on and off 101 Switch-on times of parked car

ventilation, preselecting 103 Symbols 4 status information 19

T Tachometer 70 Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 33 Tail lamp, refer to Tail

lamps 230 replacing bulb 231 Tail lamps 230 replacing bulb 231 Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 246 Tasks 193

Technical data 242 dimensions 243 Technical modifications 5 Telephone 176 hands-free system 184 phone book 182 received calls 183 redialing 183 voice commands 184 Telephone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 108

Telephone, refer to separate Owner's Manual

Teleservice Diagnosis 200 Teleservice Help 200 Temperature display outside temperature 70 outside temperature

warning 70 setting the units 74 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 68 Text message 191 Thigh support 46 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 231 Three-point safety belt 50 Through-loading system 109 Tilt alarm sensor 35 Tilt function, passenger side

mirror 52 Timer, refer to Preselecting

switch-on times 103 Tire inflation pressure 208 loss 85, 87 Tire pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 86 resetting the system 87 system limitations 86 warning lamp 87 Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 85 Tire Quality Grading 212

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

266

Tires age 212 air loss 87 breaking in 116 changing, refer to Changing

wheels 231 condition 213 damage 213 inflation pressure 208 labels 212 minimum tread depth 213 new tires 214 pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 84 pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 86

puncture 85 retreaded 214 size 212 wear indicators, refer to

Minimum tread depth 213 winter tires 215 TMC station, refer to Traffic

bulletins 138 Tone control 144 middle setting 146 Tools, refer to Onboard

vehicle tool kit 227 Top 50 of music

collection 163 Torque, refer to Engine

data 242 Tow bar 237 Tow fitting 236 Tow fittings for tow-starting

and towing away 236 Towing 236 car with automatic

transmission 236 methods 237 with 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 237

Towing and tow-starting 236 Town/city, for navigation 125 Tow rope 237

Tow-starting 236 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 86 Track selecting on CD 155 Traction control, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83

Traffic bulletins categories 139 Traffic bulletins, filtering 139 Traffic bulletins for

navigation 138 during destination

guidance 140 Traffic bulletins in navigation screen display in the map

view 139 Traffic congestion displaying traffic

bulletins 138 refer to Route, bypassing

segments 135 Transmission 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 62

automatic transmission with Steptronic 59

idle position 63 Launch Control 66 manually unlocking parking

lock 65 manual transmission 59 reverse gear 63 Transporting children

safely 54 Transport securing devices,

refer to Securing cargo 120 Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tire tread 213 Trip, deleting 133 Trip, storing 132 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 70 Triple turn signal activation 66 Trip odometer 70 Trips, changing 133

Trunk, refer to Cargo area Trunk lid 33 Comfort Access 36 emergency release 34 opening from outside 33 unlocking with remote

control 30 Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 243 Turn signal 66 indicator lamp 12 Turn signals replacing bulbs 229 triple turn signal 66 Tying down loads, refer to

Cargo loading 120

U Underbody protection, refer to

Caring for your vehicle 223 Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQR 212 Units average consumption 74 Units of measure temperature 74 Universal garage door opener,

refer to Integrated universal remote control 104

Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 29

Unlocking from inside 33 from outside 29 trunk lid 36 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 35 Unlocking without a key, refer

to Comfort Access 35 Updating the navigation

data 124 USB audio interface 166 Using contact data 194

R e

fe re

n ce

267

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

av ig

at io

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

V VCD 157 Vehicle battery 232 breaking in 116 cargo loading 119 decommissioning, refer to

Vehicle storage 226 dimensions 243 identification number, refer

to Engine compartment 217 parking 58 weight 245 Vehicle jack 232 Vehicle storage 226 Ventilation 102 draft-free 102 Ventilation when parked, refer

to Parked car ventilation 102 Vents, refer to Ventilation 102 Video menu 157 Video playback 157 Voice, refer to Destination

guidance through voice instructions 136

Voice commands overview 23 short commands 247 telephone 184 Voice instructions from

navigation system 136 repeating 136 switching on/off 136 volume 136 Voice phone book 185 Volume 144 audio sources 144 fuel tank, refer to

Capacities 246 mobile phone 180 voice instructions 136 Volume balance, tone

setting 145

W Warning and indicator

lamps 13 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 78 Warning triangle 235 Washer fluid 68 content of the reservoir 68 Washer fluid filler neck 68 Waste tray, refer to

Ashtray 109 Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 118 Water penetration 223, 224 Waveband with the radio 147 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 213 Weights 245 Welcome lamps 94 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 243 Wheels, new 214 Wheels and tires 208 Width, refer to

Dimensions 243 Wind deflector 43 Windows 37 convenient opening and

closing 30 convenient opening and

closing with Comfort Access 36

opening, closing 37 pinch protection system 38 Window washer system 67 Windshield cleaning 67 defrosting and removing

condensation 101 Windshield wash filling capacity, reservoir 246 Windshield washer reservoir,

refer to Washer fluid filler neck 68

Windshield washer system spray nozzles 68 washer fluid 68

Windshield wiper blades, changing 227

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 67

Winter tires 215 setting speed limit 80 storage 215 Wiper blade replacement 227 Wiper system 67 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to

Onboard vehicle tool kit 227

X Xenon lamps replacing bulb 227

01 40

2 60

6 81

8 u

e iD <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 1 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 1 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 1 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2012 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.